xref: /netbsd-src/external/gpl3/gcc.old/dist/gcc/doc/md.texi (revision b7b7574d3bf8eeb51a1fa3977b59142ec6434a55)
1@c Copyright (C) 1988, 1989, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1996, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001,
2@c 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
3@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4@c This is part of the GCC manual.
5@c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
6
7@ifset INTERNALS
8@node Machine Desc
9@chapter Machine Descriptions
10@cindex machine descriptions
11
12A machine description has two parts: a file of instruction patterns
13(@file{.md} file) and a C header file of macro definitions.
14
15The @file{.md} file for a target machine contains a pattern for each
16instruction that the target machine supports (or at least each instruction
17that is worth telling the compiler about).  It may also contain comments.
18A semicolon causes the rest of the line to be a comment, unless the semicolon
19is inside a quoted string.
20
21See the next chapter for information on the C header file.
22
23@menu
24* Overview::            How the machine description is used.
25* Patterns::            How to write instruction patterns.
26* Example::             An explained example of a @code{define_insn} pattern.
27* RTL Template::        The RTL template defines what insns match a pattern.
28* Output Template::     The output template says how to make assembler code
29                        from such an insn.
30* Output Statement::    For more generality, write C code to output
31                        the assembler code.
32* Predicates::          Controlling what kinds of operands can be used
33                        for an insn.
34* Constraints::         Fine-tuning operand selection.
35* Standard Names::      Names mark patterns to use for code generation.
36* Pattern Ordering::    When the order of patterns makes a difference.
37* Dependent Patterns::  Having one pattern may make you need another.
38* Jump Patterns::       Special considerations for patterns for jump insns.
39* Looping Patterns::    How to define patterns for special looping insns.
40* Insn Canonicalizations::Canonicalization of Instructions
41* Expander Definitions::Generating a sequence of several RTL insns
42                        for a standard operation.
43* Insn Splitting::      Splitting Instructions into Multiple Instructions.
44* Including Patterns::  Including Patterns in Machine Descriptions.
45* Peephole Definitions::Defining machine-specific peephole optimizations.
46* Insn Attributes::     Specifying the value of attributes for generated insns.
47* Conditional Execution::Generating @code{define_insn} patterns for
48                         predication.
49* Constant Definitions::Defining symbolic constants that can be used in the
50                        md file.
51* Iterators::           Using iterators to generate patterns from a template.
52@end menu
53
54@node Overview
55@section Overview of How the Machine Description is Used
56
57There are three main conversions that happen in the compiler:
58
59@enumerate
60
61@item
62The front end reads the source code and builds a parse tree.
63
64@item
65The parse tree is used to generate an RTL insn list based on named
66instruction patterns.
67
68@item
69The insn list is matched against the RTL templates to produce assembler
70code.
71
72@end enumerate
73
74For the generate pass, only the names of the insns matter, from either a
75named @code{define_insn} or a @code{define_expand}.  The compiler will
76choose the pattern with the right name and apply the operands according
77to the documentation later in this chapter, without regard for the RTL
78template or operand constraints.  Note that the names the compiler looks
79for are hard-coded in the compiler---it will ignore unnamed patterns and
80patterns with names it doesn't know about, but if you don't provide a
81named pattern it needs, it will abort.
82
83If a @code{define_insn} is used, the template given is inserted into the
84insn list.  If a @code{define_expand} is used, one of three things
85happens, based on the condition logic.  The condition logic may manually
86create new insns for the insn list, say via @code{emit_insn()}, and
87invoke @code{DONE}.  For certain named patterns, it may invoke @code{FAIL} to tell the
88compiler to use an alternate way of performing that task.  If it invokes
89neither @code{DONE} nor @code{FAIL}, the template given in the pattern
90is inserted, as if the @code{define_expand} were a @code{define_insn}.
91
92Once the insn list is generated, various optimization passes convert,
93replace, and rearrange the insns in the insn list.  This is where the
94@code{define_split} and @code{define_peephole} patterns get used, for
95example.
96
97Finally, the insn list's RTL is matched up with the RTL templates in the
98@code{define_insn} patterns, and those patterns are used to emit the
99final assembly code.  For this purpose, each named @code{define_insn}
100acts like it's unnamed, since the names are ignored.
101
102@node Patterns
103@section Everything about Instruction Patterns
104@cindex patterns
105@cindex instruction patterns
106
107@findex define_insn
108Each instruction pattern contains an incomplete RTL expression, with pieces
109to be filled in later, operand constraints that restrict how the pieces can
110be filled in, and an output pattern or C code to generate the assembler
111output, all wrapped up in a @code{define_insn} expression.
112
113A @code{define_insn} is an RTL expression containing four or five operands:
114
115@enumerate
116@item
117An optional name.  The presence of a name indicate that this instruction
118pattern can perform a certain standard job for the RTL-generation
119pass of the compiler.  This pass knows certain names and will use
120the instruction patterns with those names, if the names are defined
121in the machine description.
122
123The absence of a name is indicated by writing an empty string
124where the name should go.  Nameless instruction patterns are never
125used for generating RTL code, but they may permit several simpler insns
126to be combined later on.
127
128Names that are not thus known and used in RTL-generation have no
129effect; they are equivalent to no name at all.
130
131For the purpose of debugging the compiler, you may also specify a
132name beginning with the @samp{*} character.  Such a name is used only
133for identifying the instruction in RTL dumps; it is entirely equivalent
134to having a nameless pattern for all other purposes.
135
136@item
137The @dfn{RTL template} (@pxref{RTL Template}) is a vector of incomplete
138RTL expressions which show what the instruction should look like.  It is
139incomplete because it may contain @code{match_operand},
140@code{match_operator}, and @code{match_dup} expressions that stand for
141operands of the instruction.
142
143If the vector has only one element, that element is the template for the
144instruction pattern.  If the vector has multiple elements, then the
145instruction pattern is a @code{parallel} expression containing the
146elements described.
147
148@item
149@cindex pattern conditions
150@cindex conditions, in patterns
151A condition.  This is a string which contains a C expression that is
152the final test to decide whether an insn body matches this pattern.
153
154@cindex named patterns and conditions
155For a named pattern, the condition (if present) may not depend on
156the data in the insn being matched, but only the target-machine-type
157flags.  The compiler needs to test these conditions during
158initialization in order to learn exactly which named instructions are
159available in a particular run.
160
161@findex operands
162For nameless patterns, the condition is applied only when matching an
163individual insn, and only after the insn has matched the pattern's
164recognition template.  The insn's operands may be found in the vector
165@code{operands}.  For an insn where the condition has once matched, it
166can't be used to control register allocation, for example by excluding
167certain hard registers or hard register combinations.
168
169@item
170The @dfn{output template}: a string that says how to output matching
171insns as assembler code.  @samp{%} in this string specifies where
172to substitute the value of an operand.  @xref{Output Template}.
173
174When simple substitution isn't general enough, you can specify a piece
175of C code to compute the output.  @xref{Output Statement}.
176
177@item
178Optionally, a vector containing the values of attributes for insns matching
179this pattern.  @xref{Insn Attributes}.
180@end enumerate
181
182@node Example
183@section Example of @code{define_insn}
184@cindex @code{define_insn} example
185
186Here is an actual example of an instruction pattern, for the 68000/68020.
187
188@smallexample
189(define_insn "tstsi"
190  [(set (cc0)
191        (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "rm"))]
192  ""
193  "*
194@{
195  if (TARGET_68020 || ! ADDRESS_REG_P (operands[0]))
196    return \"tstl %0\";
197  return \"cmpl #0,%0\";
198@}")
199@end smallexample
200
201@noindent
202This can also be written using braced strings:
203
204@smallexample
205(define_insn "tstsi"
206  [(set (cc0)
207        (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "rm"))]
208  ""
209@{
210  if (TARGET_68020 || ! ADDRESS_REG_P (operands[0]))
211    return "tstl %0";
212  return "cmpl #0,%0";
213@})
214@end smallexample
215
216This is an instruction that sets the condition codes based on the value of
217a general operand.  It has no condition, so any insn whose RTL description
218has the form shown may be handled according to this pattern.  The name
219@samp{tstsi} means ``test a @code{SImode} value'' and tells the RTL generation
220pass that, when it is necessary to test such a value, an insn to do so
221can be constructed using this pattern.
222
223The output control string is a piece of C code which chooses which
224output template to return based on the kind of operand and the specific
225type of CPU for which code is being generated.
226
227@samp{"rm"} is an operand constraint.  Its meaning is explained below.
228
229@node RTL Template
230@section RTL Template
231@cindex RTL insn template
232@cindex generating insns
233@cindex insns, generating
234@cindex recognizing insns
235@cindex insns, recognizing
236
237The RTL template is used to define which insns match the particular pattern
238and how to find their operands.  For named patterns, the RTL template also
239says how to construct an insn from specified operands.
240
241Construction involves substituting specified operands into a copy of the
242template.  Matching involves determining the values that serve as the
243operands in the insn being matched.  Both of these activities are
244controlled by special expression types that direct matching and
245substitution of the operands.
246
247@table @code
248@findex match_operand
249@item (match_operand:@var{m} @var{n} @var{predicate} @var{constraint})
250This expression is a placeholder for operand number @var{n} of
251the insn.  When constructing an insn, operand number @var{n}
252will be substituted at this point.  When matching an insn, whatever
253appears at this position in the insn will be taken as operand
254number @var{n}; but it must satisfy @var{predicate} or this instruction
255pattern will not match at all.
256
257Operand numbers must be chosen consecutively counting from zero in
258each instruction pattern.  There may be only one @code{match_operand}
259expression in the pattern for each operand number.  Usually operands
260are numbered in the order of appearance in @code{match_operand}
261expressions.  In the case of a @code{define_expand}, any operand numbers
262used only in @code{match_dup} expressions have higher values than all
263other operand numbers.
264
265@var{predicate} is a string that is the name of a function that
266accepts two arguments, an expression and a machine mode.
267@xref{Predicates}.  During matching, the function will be called with
268the putative operand as the expression and @var{m} as the mode
269argument (if @var{m} is not specified, @code{VOIDmode} will be used,
270which normally causes @var{predicate} to accept any mode).  If it
271returns zero, this instruction pattern fails to match.
272@var{predicate} may be an empty string; then it means no test is to be
273done on the operand, so anything which occurs in this position is
274valid.
275
276Most of the time, @var{predicate} will reject modes other than @var{m}---but
277not always.  For example, the predicate @code{address_operand} uses
278@var{m} as the mode of memory ref that the address should be valid for.
279Many predicates accept @code{const_int} nodes even though their mode is
280@code{VOIDmode}.
281
282@var{constraint} controls reloading and the choice of the best register
283class to use for a value, as explained later (@pxref{Constraints}).
284If the constraint would be an empty string, it can be omitted.
285
286People are often unclear on the difference between the constraint and the
287predicate.  The predicate helps decide whether a given insn matches the
288pattern.  The constraint plays no role in this decision; instead, it
289controls various decisions in the case of an insn which does match.
290
291@findex match_scratch
292@item (match_scratch:@var{m} @var{n} @var{constraint})
293This expression is also a placeholder for operand number @var{n}
294and indicates that operand must be a @code{scratch} or @code{reg}
295expression.
296
297When matching patterns, this is equivalent to
298
299@smallexample
300(match_operand:@var{m} @var{n} "scratch_operand" @var{pred})
301@end smallexample
302
303but, when generating RTL, it produces a (@code{scratch}:@var{m})
304expression.
305
306If the last few expressions in a @code{parallel} are @code{clobber}
307expressions whose operands are either a hard register or
308@code{match_scratch}, the combiner can add or delete them when
309necessary.  @xref{Side Effects}.
310
311@findex match_dup
312@item (match_dup @var{n})
313This expression is also a placeholder for operand number @var{n}.
314It is used when the operand needs to appear more than once in the
315insn.
316
317In construction, @code{match_dup} acts just like @code{match_operand}:
318the operand is substituted into the insn being constructed.  But in
319matching, @code{match_dup} behaves differently.  It assumes that operand
320number @var{n} has already been determined by a @code{match_operand}
321appearing earlier in the recognition template, and it matches only an
322identical-looking expression.
323
324Note that @code{match_dup} should not be used to tell the compiler that
325a particular register is being used for two operands (example:
326@code{add} that adds one register to another; the second register is
327both an input operand and the output operand).  Use a matching
328constraint (@pxref{Simple Constraints}) for those.  @code{match_dup} is for the cases where one
329operand is used in two places in the template, such as an instruction
330that computes both a quotient and a remainder, where the opcode takes
331two input operands but the RTL template has to refer to each of those
332twice; once for the quotient pattern and once for the remainder pattern.
333
334@findex match_operator
335@item (match_operator:@var{m} @var{n} @var{predicate} [@var{operands}@dots{}])
336This pattern is a kind of placeholder for a variable RTL expression
337code.
338
339When constructing an insn, it stands for an RTL expression whose
340expression code is taken from that of operand @var{n}, and whose
341operands are constructed from the patterns @var{operands}.
342
343When matching an expression, it matches an expression if the function
344@var{predicate} returns nonzero on that expression @emph{and} the
345patterns @var{operands} match the operands of the expression.
346
347Suppose that the function @code{commutative_operator} is defined as
348follows, to match any expression whose operator is one of the
349commutative arithmetic operators of RTL and whose mode is @var{mode}:
350
351@smallexample
352int
353commutative_integer_operator (x, mode)
354     rtx x;
355     enum machine_mode mode;
356@{
357  enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
358  if (GET_MODE (x) != mode)
359    return 0;
360  return (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == RTX_COMM_ARITH
361          || code == EQ || code == NE);
362@}
363@end smallexample
364
365Then the following pattern will match any RTL expression consisting
366of a commutative operator applied to two general operands:
367
368@smallexample
369(match_operator:SI 3 "commutative_operator"
370  [(match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "g")
371   (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "g")])
372@end smallexample
373
374Here the vector @code{[@var{operands}@dots{}]} contains two patterns
375because the expressions to be matched all contain two operands.
376
377When this pattern does match, the two operands of the commutative
378operator are recorded as operands 1 and 2 of the insn.  (This is done
379by the two instances of @code{match_operand}.)  Operand 3 of the insn
380will be the entire commutative expression: use @code{GET_CODE
381(operands[3])} to see which commutative operator was used.
382
383The machine mode @var{m} of @code{match_operator} works like that of
384@code{match_operand}: it is passed as the second argument to the
385predicate function, and that function is solely responsible for
386deciding whether the expression to be matched ``has'' that mode.
387
388When constructing an insn, argument 3 of the gen-function will specify
389the operation (i.e.@: the expression code) for the expression to be
390made.  It should be an RTL expression, whose expression code is copied
391into a new expression whose operands are arguments 1 and 2 of the
392gen-function.  The subexpressions of argument 3 are not used;
393only its expression code matters.
394
395When @code{match_operator} is used in a pattern for matching an insn,
396it usually best if the operand number of the @code{match_operator}
397is higher than that of the actual operands of the insn.  This improves
398register allocation because the register allocator often looks at
399operands 1 and 2 of insns to see if it can do register tying.
400
401There is no way to specify constraints in @code{match_operator}.  The
402operand of the insn which corresponds to the @code{match_operator}
403never has any constraints because it is never reloaded as a whole.
404However, if parts of its @var{operands} are matched by
405@code{match_operand} patterns, those parts may have constraints of
406their own.
407
408@findex match_op_dup
409@item (match_op_dup:@var{m} @var{n}[@var{operands}@dots{}])
410Like @code{match_dup}, except that it applies to operators instead of
411operands.  When constructing an insn, operand number @var{n} will be
412substituted at this point.  But in matching, @code{match_op_dup} behaves
413differently.  It assumes that operand number @var{n} has already been
414determined by a @code{match_operator} appearing earlier in the
415recognition template, and it matches only an identical-looking
416expression.
417
418@findex match_parallel
419@item (match_parallel @var{n} @var{predicate} [@var{subpat}@dots{}])
420This pattern is a placeholder for an insn that consists of a
421@code{parallel} expression with a variable number of elements.  This
422expression should only appear at the top level of an insn pattern.
423
424When constructing an insn, operand number @var{n} will be substituted at
425this point.  When matching an insn, it matches if the body of the insn
426is a @code{parallel} expression with at least as many elements as the
427vector of @var{subpat} expressions in the @code{match_parallel}, if each
428@var{subpat} matches the corresponding element of the @code{parallel},
429@emph{and} the function @var{predicate} returns nonzero on the
430@code{parallel} that is the body of the insn.  It is the responsibility
431of the predicate to validate elements of the @code{parallel} beyond
432those listed in the @code{match_parallel}.
433
434A typical use of @code{match_parallel} is to match load and store
435multiple expressions, which can contain a variable number of elements
436in a @code{parallel}.  For example,
437
438@smallexample
439(define_insn ""
440  [(match_parallel 0 "load_multiple_operation"
441     [(set (match_operand:SI 1 "gpc_reg_operand" "=r")
442           (match_operand:SI 2 "memory_operand" "m"))
443      (use (reg:SI 179))
444      (clobber (reg:SI 179))])]
445  ""
446  "loadm 0,0,%1,%2")
447@end smallexample
448
449This example comes from @file{a29k.md}.  The function
450@code{load_multiple_operation} is defined in @file{a29k.c} and checks
451that subsequent elements in the @code{parallel} are the same as the
452@code{set} in the pattern, except that they are referencing subsequent
453registers and memory locations.
454
455An insn that matches this pattern might look like:
456
457@smallexample
458(parallel
459 [(set (reg:SI 20) (mem:SI (reg:SI 100)))
460  (use (reg:SI 179))
461  (clobber (reg:SI 179))
462  (set (reg:SI 21)
463       (mem:SI (plus:SI (reg:SI 100)
464                        (const_int 4))))
465  (set (reg:SI 22)
466       (mem:SI (plus:SI (reg:SI 100)
467                        (const_int 8))))])
468@end smallexample
469
470@findex match_par_dup
471@item (match_par_dup @var{n} [@var{subpat}@dots{}])
472Like @code{match_op_dup}, but for @code{match_parallel} instead of
473@code{match_operator}.
474
475@end table
476
477@node Output Template
478@section Output Templates and Operand Substitution
479@cindex output templates
480@cindex operand substitution
481
482@cindex @samp{%} in template
483@cindex percent sign
484The @dfn{output template} is a string which specifies how to output the
485assembler code for an instruction pattern.  Most of the template is a
486fixed string which is output literally.  The character @samp{%} is used
487to specify where to substitute an operand; it can also be used to
488identify places where different variants of the assembler require
489different syntax.
490
491In the simplest case, a @samp{%} followed by a digit @var{n} says to output
492operand @var{n} at that point in the string.
493
494@samp{%} followed by a letter and a digit says to output an operand in an
495alternate fashion.  Four letters have standard, built-in meanings described
496below.  The machine description macro @code{PRINT_OPERAND} can define
497additional letters with nonstandard meanings.
498
499@samp{%c@var{digit}} can be used to substitute an operand that is a
500constant value without the syntax that normally indicates an immediate
501operand.
502
503@samp{%n@var{digit}} is like @samp{%c@var{digit}} except that the value of
504the constant is negated before printing.
505
506@samp{%a@var{digit}} can be used to substitute an operand as if it were a
507memory reference, with the actual operand treated as the address.  This may
508be useful when outputting a ``load address'' instruction, because often the
509assembler syntax for such an instruction requires you to write the operand
510as if it were a memory reference.
511
512@samp{%l@var{digit}} is used to substitute a @code{label_ref} into a jump
513instruction.
514
515@samp{%=} outputs a number which is unique to each instruction in the
516entire compilation.  This is useful for making local labels to be
517referred to more than once in a single template that generates multiple
518assembler instructions.
519
520@samp{%} followed by a punctuation character specifies a substitution that
521does not use an operand.  Only one case is standard: @samp{%%} outputs a
522@samp{%} into the assembler code.  Other nonstandard cases can be
523defined in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro.  You must also define
524which punctuation characters are valid with the
525@code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} macro.
526
527@cindex \
528@cindex backslash
529The template may generate multiple assembler instructions.  Write the text
530for the instructions, with @samp{\;} between them.
531
532@cindex matching operands
533When the RTL contains two operands which are required by constraint to match
534each other, the output template must refer only to the lower-numbered operand.
535Matching operands are not always identical, and the rest of the compiler
536arranges to put the proper RTL expression for printing into the lower-numbered
537operand.
538
539One use of nonstandard letters or punctuation following @samp{%} is to
540distinguish between different assembler languages for the same machine; for
541example, Motorola syntax versus MIT syntax for the 68000.  Motorola syntax
542requires periods in most opcode names, while MIT syntax does not.  For
543example, the opcode @samp{movel} in MIT syntax is @samp{move.l} in Motorola
544syntax.  The same file of patterns is used for both kinds of output syntax,
545but the character sequence @samp{%.} is used in each place where Motorola
546syntax wants a period.  The @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro for Motorola syntax
547defines the sequence to output a period; the macro for MIT syntax defines
548it to do nothing.
549
550@cindex @code{#} in template
551As a special case, a template consisting of the single character @code{#}
552instructs the compiler to first split the insn, and then output the
553resulting instructions separately.  This helps eliminate redundancy in the
554output templates.   If you have a @code{define_insn} that needs to emit
555multiple assembler instructions, and there is a matching @code{define_split}
556already defined, then you can simply use @code{#} as the output template
557instead of writing an output template that emits the multiple assembler
558instructions.
559
560If the macro @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is defined, you can use construct
561of the form @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@}} in the templates.  These
562describe multiple variants of assembler language syntax.
563@xref{Instruction Output}.
564
565@node Output Statement
566@section C Statements for Assembler Output
567@cindex output statements
568@cindex C statements for assembler output
569@cindex generating assembler output
570
571Often a single fixed template string cannot produce correct and efficient
572assembler code for all the cases that are recognized by a single
573instruction pattern.  For example, the opcodes may depend on the kinds of
574operands; or some unfortunate combinations of operands may require extra
575machine instructions.
576
577If the output control string starts with a @samp{@@}, then it is actually
578a series of templates, each on a separate line.  (Blank lines and
579leading spaces and tabs are ignored.)  The templates correspond to the
580pattern's constraint alternatives (@pxref{Multi-Alternative}).  For example,
581if a target machine has a two-address add instruction @samp{addr} to add
582into a register and another @samp{addm} to add a register to memory, you
583might write this pattern:
584
585@smallexample
586(define_insn "addsi3"
587  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,m")
588        (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0,0")
589                 (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "g,r")))]
590  ""
591  "@@
592   addr %2,%0
593   addm %2,%0")
594@end smallexample
595
596@cindex @code{*} in template
597@cindex asterisk in template
598If the output control string starts with a @samp{*}, then it is not an
599output template but rather a piece of C program that should compute a
600template.  It should execute a @code{return} statement to return the
601template-string you want.  Most such templates use C string literals, which
602require doublequote characters to delimit them.  To include these
603doublequote characters in the string, prefix each one with @samp{\}.
604
605If the output control string is written as a brace block instead of a
606double-quoted string, it is automatically assumed to be C code.  In that
607case, it is not necessary to put in a leading asterisk, or to escape the
608doublequotes surrounding C string literals.
609
610The operands may be found in the array @code{operands}, whose C data type
611is @code{rtx []}.
612
613It is very common to select different ways of generating assembler code
614based on whether an immediate operand is within a certain range.  Be
615careful when doing this, because the result of @code{INTVAL} is an
616integer on the host machine.  If the host machine has more bits in an
617@code{int} than the target machine has in the mode in which the constant
618will be used, then some of the bits you get from @code{INTVAL} will be
619superfluous.  For proper results, you must carefully disregard the
620values of those bits.
621
622@findex output_asm_insn
623It is possible to output an assembler instruction and then go on to output
624or compute more of them, using the subroutine @code{output_asm_insn}.  This
625receives two arguments: a template-string and a vector of operands.  The
626vector may be @code{operands}, or it may be another array of @code{rtx}
627that you declare locally and initialize yourself.
628
629@findex which_alternative
630When an insn pattern has multiple alternatives in its constraints, often
631the appearance of the assembler code is determined mostly by which alternative
632was matched.  When this is so, the C code can test the variable
633@code{which_alternative}, which is the ordinal number of the alternative
634that was actually satisfied (0 for the first, 1 for the second alternative,
635etc.).
636
637For example, suppose there are two opcodes for storing zero, @samp{clrreg}
638for registers and @samp{clrmem} for memory locations.  Here is how
639a pattern could use @code{which_alternative} to choose between them:
640
641@smallexample
642(define_insn ""
643  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,m")
644        (const_int 0))]
645  ""
646  @{
647  return (which_alternative == 0
648          ? "clrreg %0" : "clrmem %0");
649  @})
650@end smallexample
651
652The example above, where the assembler code to generate was
653@emph{solely} determined by the alternative, could also have been specified
654as follows, having the output control string start with a @samp{@@}:
655
656@smallexample
657@group
658(define_insn ""
659  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,m")
660        (const_int 0))]
661  ""
662  "@@
663   clrreg %0
664   clrmem %0")
665@end group
666@end smallexample
667
668@node Predicates
669@section Predicates
670@cindex predicates
671@cindex operand predicates
672@cindex operator predicates
673
674A predicate determines whether a @code{match_operand} or
675@code{match_operator} expression matches, and therefore whether the
676surrounding instruction pattern will be used for that combination of
677operands.  GCC has a number of machine-independent predicates, and you
678can define machine-specific predicates as needed.  By convention,
679predicates used with @code{match_operand} have names that end in
680@samp{_operand}, and those used with @code{match_operator} have names
681that end in @samp{_operator}.
682
683All predicates are Boolean functions (in the mathematical sense) of
684two arguments: the RTL expression that is being considered at that
685position in the instruction pattern, and the machine mode that the
686@code{match_operand} or @code{match_operator} specifies.  In this
687section, the first argument is called @var{op} and the second argument
688@var{mode}.  Predicates can be called from C as ordinary two-argument
689functions; this can be useful in output templates or other
690machine-specific code.
691
692Operand predicates can allow operands that are not actually acceptable
693to the hardware, as long as the constraints give reload the ability to
694fix them up (@pxref{Constraints}).  However, GCC will usually generate
695better code if the predicates specify the requirements of the machine
696instructions as closely as possible.  Reload cannot fix up operands
697that must be constants (``immediate operands''); you must use a
698predicate that allows only constants, or else enforce the requirement
699in the extra condition.
700
701@cindex predicates and machine modes
702@cindex normal predicates
703@cindex special predicates
704Most predicates handle their @var{mode} argument in a uniform manner.
705If @var{mode} is @code{VOIDmode} (unspecified), then @var{op} can have
706any mode.  If @var{mode} is anything else, then @var{op} must have the
707same mode, unless @var{op} is a @code{CONST_INT} or integer
708@code{CONST_DOUBLE}.  These RTL expressions always have
709@code{VOIDmode}, so it would be counterproductive to check that their
710mode matches.  Instead, predicates that accept @code{CONST_INT} and/or
711integer @code{CONST_DOUBLE} check that the value stored in the
712constant will fit in the requested mode.
713
714Predicates with this behavior are called @dfn{normal}.
715@command{genrecog} can optimize the instruction recognizer based on
716knowledge of how normal predicates treat modes.  It can also diagnose
717certain kinds of common errors in the use of normal predicates; for
718instance, it is almost always an error to use a normal predicate
719without specifying a mode.
720
721Predicates that do something different with their @var{mode} argument
722are called @dfn{special}.  The generic predicates
723@code{address_operand} and @code{pmode_register_operand} are special
724predicates.  @command{genrecog} does not do any optimizations or
725diagnosis when special predicates are used.
726
727@menu
728* Machine-Independent Predicates::  Predicates available to all back ends.
729* Defining Predicates::             How to write machine-specific predicate
730                                    functions.
731@end menu
732
733@node Machine-Independent Predicates
734@subsection Machine-Independent Predicates
735@cindex machine-independent predicates
736@cindex generic predicates
737
738These are the generic predicates available to all back ends.  They are
739defined in @file{recog.c}.  The first category of predicates allow
740only constant, or @dfn{immediate}, operands.
741
742@defun immediate_operand
743This predicate allows any sort of constant that fits in @var{mode}.
744It is an appropriate choice for instructions that take operands that
745must be constant.
746@end defun
747
748@defun const_int_operand
749This predicate allows any @code{CONST_INT} expression that fits in
750@var{mode}.  It is an appropriate choice for an immediate operand that
751does not allow a symbol or label.
752@end defun
753
754@defun const_double_operand
755This predicate accepts any @code{CONST_DOUBLE} expression that has
756exactly @var{mode}.  If @var{mode} is @code{VOIDmode}, it will also
757accept @code{CONST_INT}.  It is intended for immediate floating point
758constants.
759@end defun
760
761@noindent
762The second category of predicates allow only some kind of machine
763register.
764
765@defun register_operand
766This predicate allows any @code{REG} or @code{SUBREG} expression that
767is valid for @var{mode}.  It is often suitable for arithmetic
768instruction operands on a RISC machine.
769@end defun
770
771@defun pmode_register_operand
772This is a slight variant on @code{register_operand} which works around
773a limitation in the machine-description reader.
774
775@smallexample
776(match_operand @var{n} "pmode_register_operand" @var{constraint})
777@end smallexample
778
779@noindent
780means exactly what
781
782@smallexample
783(match_operand:P @var{n} "register_operand" @var{constraint})
784@end smallexample
785
786@noindent
787would mean, if the machine-description reader accepted @samp{:P}
788mode suffixes.  Unfortunately, it cannot, because @code{Pmode} is an
789alias for some other mode, and might vary with machine-specific
790options.  @xref{Misc}.
791@end defun
792
793@defun scratch_operand
794This predicate allows hard registers and @code{SCRATCH} expressions,
795but not pseudo-registers.  It is used internally by @code{match_scratch};
796it should not be used directly.
797@end defun
798
799@noindent
800The third category of predicates allow only some kind of memory reference.
801
802@defun memory_operand
803This predicate allows any valid reference to a quantity of mode
804@var{mode} in memory, as determined by the weak form of
805@code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} (@pxref{Addressing Modes}).
806@end defun
807
808@defun address_operand
809This predicate is a little unusual; it allows any operand that is a
810valid expression for the @emph{address} of a quantity of mode
811@var{mode}, again determined by the weak form of
812@code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS}.  To first order, if
813@samp{@w{(mem:@var{mode} (@var{exp}))}} is acceptable to
814@code{memory_operand}, then @var{exp} is acceptable to
815@code{address_operand}.  Note that @var{exp} does not necessarily have
816the mode @var{mode}.
817@end defun
818
819@defun indirect_operand
820This is a stricter form of @code{memory_operand} which allows only
821memory references with a @code{general_operand} as the address
822expression.  New uses of this predicate are discouraged, because
823@code{general_operand} is very permissive, so it's hard to tell what
824an @code{indirect_operand} does or does not allow.  If a target has
825different requirements for memory operands for different instructions,
826it is better to define target-specific predicates which enforce the
827hardware's requirements explicitly.
828@end defun
829
830@defun push_operand
831This predicate allows a memory reference suitable for pushing a value
832onto the stack.  This will be a @code{MEM} which refers to
833@code{stack_pointer_rtx}, with a side-effect in its address expression
834(@pxref{Incdec}); which one is determined by the
835@code{STACK_PUSH_CODE} macro (@pxref{Frame Layout}).
836@end defun
837
838@defun pop_operand
839This predicate allows a memory reference suitable for popping a value
840off the stack.  Again, this will be a @code{MEM} referring to
841@code{stack_pointer_rtx}, with a side-effect in its address
842expression.  However, this time @code{STACK_POP_CODE} is expected.
843@end defun
844
845@noindent
846The fourth category of predicates allow some combination of the above
847operands.
848
849@defun nonmemory_operand
850This predicate allows any immediate or register operand valid for @var{mode}.
851@end defun
852
853@defun nonimmediate_operand
854This predicate allows any register or memory operand valid for @var{mode}.
855@end defun
856
857@defun general_operand
858This predicate allows any immediate, register, or memory operand
859valid for @var{mode}.
860@end defun
861
862@noindent
863Finally, there are two generic operator predicates.
864
865@defun comparison_operator
866This predicate matches any expression which performs an arithmetic
867comparison in @var{mode}; that is, @code{COMPARISON_P} is true for the
868expression code.
869@end defun
870
871@defun ordered_comparison_operator
872This predicate matches any expression which performs an arithmetic
873comparison in @var{mode} and whose expression code is valid for integer
874modes; that is, the expression code will be one of @code{eq}, @code{ne},
875@code{lt}, @code{ltu}, @code{le}, @code{leu}, @code{gt}, @code{gtu},
876@code{ge}, @code{geu}.
877@end defun
878
879@node Defining Predicates
880@subsection Defining Machine-Specific Predicates
881@cindex defining predicates
882@findex define_predicate
883@findex define_special_predicate
884
885Many machines have requirements for their operands that cannot be
886expressed precisely using the generic predicates.  You can define
887additional predicates using @code{define_predicate} and
888@code{define_special_predicate} expressions.  These expressions have
889three operands:
890
891@itemize @bullet
892@item
893The name of the predicate, as it will be referred to in
894@code{match_operand} or @code{match_operator} expressions.
895
896@item
897An RTL expression which evaluates to true if the predicate allows the
898operand @var{op}, false if it does not.  This expression can only use
899the following RTL codes:
900
901@table @code
902@item MATCH_OPERAND
903When written inside a predicate expression, a @code{MATCH_OPERAND}
904expression evaluates to true if the predicate it names would allow
905@var{op}.  The operand number and constraint are ignored.  Due to
906limitations in @command{genrecog}, you can only refer to generic
907predicates and predicates that have already been defined.
908
909@item MATCH_CODE
910This expression evaluates to true if @var{op} or a specified
911subexpression of @var{op} has one of a given list of RTX codes.
912
913The first operand of this expression is a string constant containing a
914comma-separated list of RTX code names (in lower case).  These are the
915codes for which the @code{MATCH_CODE} will be true.
916
917The second operand is a string constant which indicates what
918subexpression of @var{op} to examine.  If it is absent or the empty
919string, @var{op} itself is examined.  Otherwise, the string constant
920must be a sequence of digits and/or lowercase letters.  Each character
921indicates a subexpression to extract from the current expression; for
922the first character this is @var{op}, for the second and subsequent
923characters it is the result of the previous character.  A digit
924@var{n} extracts @samp{@w{XEXP (@var{e}, @var{n})}}; a letter @var{l}
925extracts @samp{@w{XVECEXP (@var{e}, 0, @var{n})}} where @var{n} is the
926alphabetic ordinal of @var{l} (0 for `a', 1 for 'b', and so on).  The
927@code{MATCH_CODE} then examines the RTX code of the subexpression
928extracted by the complete string.  It is not possible to extract
929components of an @code{rtvec} that is not at position 0 within its RTX
930object.
931
932@item MATCH_TEST
933This expression has one operand, a string constant containing a C
934expression.  The predicate's arguments, @var{op} and @var{mode}, are
935available with those names in the C expression.  The @code{MATCH_TEST}
936evaluates to true if the C expression evaluates to a nonzero value.
937@code{MATCH_TEST} expressions must not have side effects.
938
939@item  AND
940@itemx IOR
941@itemx NOT
942@itemx IF_THEN_ELSE
943The basic @samp{MATCH_} expressions can be combined using these
944logical operators, which have the semantics of the C operators
945@samp{&&}, @samp{||}, @samp{!}, and @samp{@w{? :}} respectively.  As
946in Common Lisp, you may give an @code{AND} or @code{IOR} expression an
947arbitrary number of arguments; this has exactly the same effect as
948writing a chain of two-argument @code{AND} or @code{IOR} expressions.
949@end table
950
951@item
952An optional block of C code, which should execute
953@samp{@w{return true}} if the predicate is found to match and
954@samp{@w{return false}} if it does not.  It must not have any side
955effects.  The predicate arguments, @var{op} and @var{mode}, are
956available with those names.
957
958If a code block is present in a predicate definition, then the RTL
959expression must evaluate to true @emph{and} the code block must
960execute @samp{@w{return true}} for the predicate to allow the operand.
961The RTL expression is evaluated first; do not re-check anything in the
962code block that was checked in the RTL expression.
963@end itemize
964
965The program @command{genrecog} scans @code{define_predicate} and
966@code{define_special_predicate} expressions to determine which RTX
967codes are possibly allowed.  You should always make this explicit in
968the RTL predicate expression, using @code{MATCH_OPERAND} and
969@code{MATCH_CODE}.
970
971Here is an example of a simple predicate definition, from the IA64
972machine description:
973
974@smallexample
975@group
976;; @r{True if @var{op} is a @code{SYMBOL_REF} which refers to the sdata section.}
977(define_predicate "small_addr_symbolic_operand"
978  (and (match_code "symbol_ref")
979       (match_test "SYMBOL_REF_SMALL_ADDR_P (op)")))
980@end group
981@end smallexample
982
983@noindent
984And here is another, showing the use of the C block.
985
986@smallexample
987@group
988;; @r{True if @var{op} is a register operand that is (or could be) a GR reg.}
989(define_predicate "gr_register_operand"
990  (match_operand 0 "register_operand")
991@{
992  unsigned int regno;
993  if (GET_CODE (op) == SUBREG)
994    op = SUBREG_REG (op);
995
996  regno = REGNO (op);
997  return (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || GENERAL_REGNO_P (regno));
998@})
999@end group
1000@end smallexample
1001
1002Predicates written with @code{define_predicate} automatically include
1003a test that @var{mode} is @code{VOIDmode}, or @var{op} has the same
1004mode as @var{mode}, or @var{op} is a @code{CONST_INT} or
1005@code{CONST_DOUBLE}.  They do @emph{not} check specifically for
1006integer @code{CONST_DOUBLE}, nor do they test that the value of either
1007kind of constant fits in the requested mode.  This is because
1008target-specific predicates that take constants usually have to do more
1009stringent value checks anyway.  If you need the exact same treatment
1010of @code{CONST_INT} or @code{CONST_DOUBLE} that the generic predicates
1011provide, use a @code{MATCH_OPERAND} subexpression to call
1012@code{const_int_operand}, @code{const_double_operand}, or
1013@code{immediate_operand}.
1014
1015Predicates written with @code{define_special_predicate} do not get any
1016automatic mode checks, and are treated as having special mode handling
1017by @command{genrecog}.
1018
1019The program @command{genpreds} is responsible for generating code to
1020test predicates.  It also writes a header file containing function
1021declarations for all machine-specific predicates.  It is not necessary
1022to declare these predicates in @file{@var{cpu}-protos.h}.
1023@end ifset
1024
1025@c Most of this node appears by itself (in a different place) even
1026@c when the INTERNALS flag is clear.  Passages that require the internals
1027@c manual's context are conditionalized to appear only in the internals manual.
1028@ifset INTERNALS
1029@node Constraints
1030@section Operand Constraints
1031@cindex operand constraints
1032@cindex constraints
1033
1034Each @code{match_operand} in an instruction pattern can specify
1035constraints for the operands allowed.  The constraints allow you to
1036fine-tune matching within the set of operands allowed by the
1037predicate.
1038
1039@end ifset
1040@ifclear INTERNALS
1041@node Constraints
1042@section Constraints for @code{asm} Operands
1043@cindex operand constraints, @code{asm}
1044@cindex constraints, @code{asm}
1045@cindex @code{asm} constraints
1046
1047Here are specific details on what constraint letters you can use with
1048@code{asm} operands.
1049@end ifclear
1050Constraints can say whether
1051an operand may be in a register, and which kinds of register; whether the
1052operand can be a memory reference, and which kinds of address; whether the
1053operand may be an immediate constant, and which possible values it may
1054have.  Constraints can also require two operands to match.
1055
1056@ifset INTERNALS
1057@menu
1058* Simple Constraints::  Basic use of constraints.
1059* Multi-Alternative::   When an insn has two alternative constraint-patterns.
1060* Class Preferences::   Constraints guide which hard register to put things in.
1061* Modifiers::           More precise control over effects of constraints.
1062* Disable Insn Alternatives:: Disable insn alternatives using the @code{enabled} attribute.
1063* Machine Constraints:: Existing constraints for some particular machines.
1064* Define Constraints::  How to define machine-specific constraints.
1065* C Constraint Interface:: How to test constraints from C code.
1066@end menu
1067@end ifset
1068
1069@ifclear INTERNALS
1070@menu
1071* Simple Constraints::  Basic use of constraints.
1072* Multi-Alternative::   When an insn has two alternative constraint-patterns.
1073* Modifiers::           More precise control over effects of constraints.
1074* Machine Constraints:: Special constraints for some particular machines.
1075@end menu
1076@end ifclear
1077
1078@node Simple Constraints
1079@subsection Simple Constraints
1080@cindex simple constraints
1081
1082The simplest kind of constraint is a string full of letters, each of
1083which describes one kind of operand that is permitted.  Here are
1084the letters that are allowed:
1085
1086@table @asis
1087@item whitespace
1088Whitespace characters are ignored and can be inserted at any position
1089except the first.  This enables each alternative for different operands to
1090be visually aligned in the machine description even if they have different
1091number of constraints and modifiers.
1092
1093@cindex @samp{m} in constraint
1094@cindex memory references in constraints
1095@item @samp{m}
1096A memory operand is allowed, with any kind of address that the machine
1097supports in general.
1098Note that the letter used for the general memory constraint can be
1099re-defined by a back end using the @code{TARGET_MEM_CONSTRAINT} macro.
1100
1101@cindex offsettable address
1102@cindex @samp{o} in constraint
1103@item @samp{o}
1104A memory operand is allowed, but only if the address is
1105@dfn{offsettable}.  This means that adding a small integer (actually,
1106the width in bytes of the operand, as determined by its machine mode)
1107may be added to the address and the result is also a valid memory
1108address.
1109
1110@cindex autoincrement/decrement addressing
1111For example, an address which is constant is offsettable; so is an
1112address that is the sum of a register and a constant (as long as a
1113slightly larger constant is also within the range of address-offsets
1114supported by the machine); but an autoincrement or autodecrement
1115address is not offsettable.  More complicated indirect/indexed
1116addresses may or may not be offsettable depending on the other
1117addressing modes that the machine supports.
1118
1119Note that in an output operand which can be matched by another
1120operand, the constraint letter @samp{o} is valid only when accompanied
1121by both @samp{<} (if the target machine has predecrement addressing)
1122and @samp{>} (if the target machine has preincrement addressing).
1123
1124@cindex @samp{V} in constraint
1125@item @samp{V}
1126A memory operand that is not offsettable.  In other words, anything that
1127would fit the @samp{m} constraint but not the @samp{o} constraint.
1128
1129@cindex @samp{<} in constraint
1130@item @samp{<}
1131A memory operand with autodecrement addressing (either predecrement or
1132postdecrement) is allowed.
1133
1134@cindex @samp{>} in constraint
1135@item @samp{>}
1136A memory operand with autoincrement addressing (either preincrement or
1137postincrement) is allowed.
1138
1139@cindex @samp{r} in constraint
1140@cindex registers in constraints
1141@item @samp{r}
1142A register operand is allowed provided that it is in a general
1143register.
1144
1145@cindex constants in constraints
1146@cindex @samp{i} in constraint
1147@item @samp{i}
1148An immediate integer operand (one with constant value) is allowed.
1149This includes symbolic constants whose values will be known only at
1150assembly time or later.
1151
1152@cindex @samp{n} in constraint
1153@item @samp{n}
1154An immediate integer operand with a known numeric value is allowed.
1155Many systems cannot support assembly-time constants for operands less
1156than a word wide.  Constraints for these operands should use @samp{n}
1157rather than @samp{i}.
1158
1159@cindex @samp{I} in constraint
1160@item @samp{I}, @samp{J}, @samp{K}, @dots{} @samp{P}
1161Other letters in the range @samp{I} through @samp{P} may be defined in
1162a machine-dependent fashion to permit immediate integer operands with
1163explicit integer values in specified ranges.  For example, on the
116468000, @samp{I} is defined to stand for the range of values 1 to 8.
1165This is the range permitted as a shift count in the shift
1166instructions.
1167
1168@cindex @samp{E} in constraint
1169@item @samp{E}
1170An immediate floating operand (expression code @code{const_double}) is
1171allowed, but only if the target floating point format is the same as
1172that of the host machine (on which the compiler is running).
1173
1174@cindex @samp{F} in constraint
1175@item @samp{F}
1176An immediate floating operand (expression code @code{const_double} or
1177@code{const_vector}) is allowed.
1178
1179@cindex @samp{G} in constraint
1180@cindex @samp{H} in constraint
1181@item @samp{G}, @samp{H}
1182@samp{G} and @samp{H} may be defined in a machine-dependent fashion to
1183permit immediate floating operands in particular ranges of values.
1184
1185@cindex @samp{s} in constraint
1186@item @samp{s}
1187An immediate integer operand whose value is not an explicit integer is
1188allowed.
1189
1190This might appear strange; if an insn allows a constant operand with a
1191value not known at compile time, it certainly must allow any known
1192value.  So why use @samp{s} instead of @samp{i}?  Sometimes it allows
1193better code to be generated.
1194
1195For example, on the 68000 in a fullword instruction it is possible to
1196use an immediate operand; but if the immediate value is between @minus{}128
1197and 127, better code results from loading the value into a register and
1198using the register.  This is because the load into the register can be
1199done with a @samp{moveq} instruction.  We arrange for this to happen
1200by defining the letter @samp{K} to mean ``any integer outside the
1201range @minus{}128 to 127'', and then specifying @samp{Ks} in the operand
1202constraints.
1203
1204@cindex @samp{g} in constraint
1205@item @samp{g}
1206Any register, memory or immediate integer operand is allowed, except for
1207registers that are not general registers.
1208
1209@cindex @samp{X} in constraint
1210@item @samp{X}
1211@ifset INTERNALS
1212Any operand whatsoever is allowed, even if it does not satisfy
1213@code{general_operand}.  This is normally used in the constraint of
1214a @code{match_scratch} when certain alternatives will not actually
1215require a scratch register.
1216@end ifset
1217@ifclear INTERNALS
1218Any operand whatsoever is allowed.
1219@end ifclear
1220
1221@cindex @samp{0} in constraint
1222@cindex digits in constraint
1223@item @samp{0}, @samp{1}, @samp{2}, @dots{} @samp{9}
1224An operand that matches the specified operand number is allowed.  If a
1225digit is used together with letters within the same alternative, the
1226digit should come last.
1227
1228This number is allowed to be more than a single digit.  If multiple
1229digits are encountered consecutively, they are interpreted as a single
1230decimal integer.  There is scant chance for ambiguity, since to-date
1231it has never been desirable that @samp{10} be interpreted as matching
1232either operand 1 @emph{or} operand 0.  Should this be desired, one
1233can use multiple alternatives instead.
1234
1235@cindex matching constraint
1236@cindex constraint, matching
1237This is called a @dfn{matching constraint} and what it really means is
1238that the assembler has only a single operand that fills two roles
1239@ifset INTERNALS
1240considered separate in the RTL insn.  For example, an add insn has two
1241input operands and one output operand in the RTL, but on most CISC
1242@end ifset
1243@ifclear INTERNALS
1244which @code{asm} distinguishes.  For example, an add instruction uses
1245two input operands and an output operand, but on most CISC
1246@end ifclear
1247machines an add instruction really has only two operands, one of them an
1248input-output operand:
1249
1250@smallexample
1251addl #35,r12
1252@end smallexample
1253
1254Matching constraints are used in these circumstances.
1255More precisely, the two operands that match must include one input-only
1256operand and one output-only operand.  Moreover, the digit must be a
1257smaller number than the number of the operand that uses it in the
1258constraint.
1259
1260@ifset INTERNALS
1261For operands to match in a particular case usually means that they
1262are identical-looking RTL expressions.  But in a few special cases
1263specific kinds of dissimilarity are allowed.  For example, @code{*x}
1264as an input operand will match @code{*x++} as an output operand.
1265For proper results in such cases, the output template should always
1266use the output-operand's number when printing the operand.
1267@end ifset
1268
1269@cindex load address instruction
1270@cindex push address instruction
1271@cindex address constraints
1272@cindex @samp{p} in constraint
1273@item @samp{p}
1274An operand that is a valid memory address is allowed.  This is
1275for ``load address'' and ``push address'' instructions.
1276
1277@findex address_operand
1278@samp{p} in the constraint must be accompanied by @code{address_operand}
1279as the predicate in the @code{match_operand}.  This predicate interprets
1280the mode specified in the @code{match_operand} as the mode of the memory
1281reference for which the address would be valid.
1282
1283@cindex other register constraints
1284@cindex extensible constraints
1285@item @var{other-letters}
1286Other letters can be defined in machine-dependent fashion to stand for
1287particular classes of registers or other arbitrary operand types.
1288@samp{d}, @samp{a} and @samp{f} are defined on the 68000/68020 to stand
1289for data, address and floating point registers.
1290@end table
1291
1292@ifset INTERNALS
1293In order to have valid assembler code, each operand must satisfy
1294its constraint.  But a failure to do so does not prevent the pattern
1295from applying to an insn.  Instead, it directs the compiler to modify
1296the code so that the constraint will be satisfied.  Usually this is
1297done by copying an operand into a register.
1298
1299Contrast, therefore, the two instruction patterns that follow:
1300
1301@smallexample
1302(define_insn ""
1303  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r")
1304        (plus:SI (match_dup 0)
1305                 (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "r")))]
1306  ""
1307  "@dots{}")
1308@end smallexample
1309
1310@noindent
1311which has two operands, one of which must appear in two places, and
1312
1313@smallexample
1314(define_insn ""
1315  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r")
1316        (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0")
1317                 (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "r")))]
1318  ""
1319  "@dots{}")
1320@end smallexample
1321
1322@noindent
1323which has three operands, two of which are required by a constraint to be
1324identical.  If we are considering an insn of the form
1325
1326@smallexample
1327(insn @var{n} @var{prev} @var{next}
1328  (set (reg:SI 3)
1329       (plus:SI (reg:SI 6) (reg:SI 109)))
1330  @dots{})
1331@end smallexample
1332
1333@noindent
1334the first pattern would not apply at all, because this insn does not
1335contain two identical subexpressions in the right place.  The pattern would
1336say, ``That does not look like an add instruction; try other patterns''.
1337The second pattern would say, ``Yes, that's an add instruction, but there
1338is something wrong with it''.  It would direct the reload pass of the
1339compiler to generate additional insns to make the constraint true.  The
1340results might look like this:
1341
1342@smallexample
1343(insn @var{n2} @var{prev} @var{n}
1344  (set (reg:SI 3) (reg:SI 6))
1345  @dots{})
1346
1347(insn @var{n} @var{n2} @var{next}
1348  (set (reg:SI 3)
1349       (plus:SI (reg:SI 3) (reg:SI 109)))
1350  @dots{})
1351@end smallexample
1352
1353It is up to you to make sure that each operand, in each pattern, has
1354constraints that can handle any RTL expression that could be present for
1355that operand.  (When multiple alternatives are in use, each pattern must,
1356for each possible combination of operand expressions, have at least one
1357alternative which can handle that combination of operands.)  The
1358constraints don't need to @emph{allow} any possible operand---when this is
1359the case, they do not constrain---but they must at least point the way to
1360reloading any possible operand so that it will fit.
1361
1362@itemize @bullet
1363@item
1364If the constraint accepts whatever operands the predicate permits,
1365there is no problem: reloading is never necessary for this operand.
1366
1367For example, an operand whose constraints permit everything except
1368registers is safe provided its predicate rejects registers.
1369
1370An operand whose predicate accepts only constant values is safe
1371provided its constraints include the letter @samp{i}.  If any possible
1372constant value is accepted, then nothing less than @samp{i} will do;
1373if the predicate is more selective, then the constraints may also be
1374more selective.
1375
1376@item
1377Any operand expression can be reloaded by copying it into a register.
1378So if an operand's constraints allow some kind of register, it is
1379certain to be safe.  It need not permit all classes of registers; the
1380compiler knows how to copy a register into another register of the
1381proper class in order to make an instruction valid.
1382
1383@cindex nonoffsettable memory reference
1384@cindex memory reference, nonoffsettable
1385@item
1386A nonoffsettable memory reference can be reloaded by copying the
1387address into a register.  So if the constraint uses the letter
1388@samp{o}, all memory references are taken care of.
1389
1390@item
1391A constant operand can be reloaded by allocating space in memory to
1392hold it as preinitialized data.  Then the memory reference can be used
1393in place of the constant.  So if the constraint uses the letters
1394@samp{o} or @samp{m}, constant operands are not a problem.
1395
1396@item
1397If the constraint permits a constant and a pseudo register used in an insn
1398was not allocated to a hard register and is equivalent to a constant,
1399the register will be replaced with the constant.  If the predicate does
1400not permit a constant and the insn is re-recognized for some reason, the
1401compiler will crash.  Thus the predicate must always recognize any
1402objects allowed by the constraint.
1403@end itemize
1404
1405If the operand's predicate can recognize registers, but the constraint does
1406not permit them, it can make the compiler crash.  When this operand happens
1407to be a register, the reload pass will be stymied, because it does not know
1408how to copy a register temporarily into memory.
1409
1410If the predicate accepts a unary operator, the constraint applies to the
1411operand.  For example, the MIPS processor at ISA level 3 supports an
1412instruction which adds two registers in @code{SImode} to produce a
1413@code{DImode} result, but only if the registers are correctly sign
1414extended.  This predicate for the input operands accepts a
1415@code{sign_extend} of an @code{SImode} register.  Write the constraint
1416to indicate the type of register that is required for the operand of the
1417@code{sign_extend}.
1418@end ifset
1419
1420@node Multi-Alternative
1421@subsection Multiple Alternative Constraints
1422@cindex multiple alternative constraints
1423
1424Sometimes a single instruction has multiple alternative sets of possible
1425operands.  For example, on the 68000, a logical-or instruction can combine
1426register or an immediate value into memory, or it can combine any kind of
1427operand into a register; but it cannot combine one memory location into
1428another.
1429
1430These constraints are represented as multiple alternatives.  An alternative
1431can be described by a series of letters for each operand.  The overall
1432constraint for an operand is made from the letters for this operand
1433from the first alternative, a comma, the letters for this operand from
1434the second alternative, a comma, and so on until the last alternative.
1435@ifset INTERNALS
1436Here is how it is done for fullword logical-or on the 68000:
1437
1438@smallexample
1439(define_insn "iorsi3"
1440  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=m,d")
1441        (ior:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "%0,0")
1442                (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "dKs,dmKs")))]
1443  @dots{})
1444@end smallexample
1445
1446The first alternative has @samp{m} (memory) for operand 0, @samp{0} for
1447operand 1 (meaning it must match operand 0), and @samp{dKs} for operand
14482.  The second alternative has @samp{d} (data register) for operand 0,
1449@samp{0} for operand 1, and @samp{dmKs} for operand 2.  The @samp{=} and
1450@samp{%} in the constraints apply to all the alternatives; their
1451meaning is explained in the next section (@pxref{Class Preferences}).
1452@end ifset
1453
1454@c FIXME Is this ? and ! stuff of use in asm()?  If not, hide unless INTERNAL
1455If all the operands fit any one alternative, the instruction is valid.
1456Otherwise, for each alternative, the compiler counts how many instructions
1457must be added to copy the operands so that that alternative applies.
1458The alternative requiring the least copying is chosen.  If two alternatives
1459need the same amount of copying, the one that comes first is chosen.
1460These choices can be altered with the @samp{?} and @samp{!} characters:
1461
1462@table @code
1463@cindex @samp{?} in constraint
1464@cindex question mark
1465@item ?
1466Disparage slightly the alternative that the @samp{?} appears in,
1467as a choice when no alternative applies exactly.  The compiler regards
1468this alternative as one unit more costly for each @samp{?} that appears
1469in it.
1470
1471@cindex @samp{!} in constraint
1472@cindex exclamation point
1473@item !
1474Disparage severely the alternative that the @samp{!} appears in.
1475This alternative can still be used if it fits without reloading,
1476but if reloading is needed, some other alternative will be used.
1477@end table
1478
1479@ifset INTERNALS
1480When an insn pattern has multiple alternatives in its constraints, often
1481the appearance of the assembler code is determined mostly by which
1482alternative was matched.  When this is so, the C code for writing the
1483assembler code can use the variable @code{which_alternative}, which is
1484the ordinal number of the alternative that was actually satisfied (0 for
1485the first, 1 for the second alternative, etc.).  @xref{Output Statement}.
1486@end ifset
1487
1488@ifset INTERNALS
1489@node Class Preferences
1490@subsection Register Class Preferences
1491@cindex class preference constraints
1492@cindex register class preference constraints
1493
1494@cindex voting between constraint alternatives
1495The operand constraints have another function: they enable the compiler
1496to decide which kind of hardware register a pseudo register is best
1497allocated to.  The compiler examines the constraints that apply to the
1498insns that use the pseudo register, looking for the machine-dependent
1499letters such as @samp{d} and @samp{a} that specify classes of registers.
1500The pseudo register is put in whichever class gets the most ``votes''.
1501The constraint letters @samp{g} and @samp{r} also vote: they vote in
1502favor of a general register.  The machine description says which registers
1503are considered general.
1504
1505Of course, on some machines all registers are equivalent, and no register
1506classes are defined.  Then none of this complexity is relevant.
1507@end ifset
1508
1509@node Modifiers
1510@subsection Constraint Modifier Characters
1511@cindex modifiers in constraints
1512@cindex constraint modifier characters
1513
1514@c prevent bad page break with this line
1515Here are constraint modifier characters.
1516
1517@table @samp
1518@cindex @samp{=} in constraint
1519@item =
1520Means that this operand is write-only for this instruction: the previous
1521value is discarded and replaced by output data.
1522
1523@cindex @samp{+} in constraint
1524@item +
1525Means that this operand is both read and written by the instruction.
1526
1527When the compiler fixes up the operands to satisfy the constraints,
1528it needs to know which operands are inputs to the instruction and
1529which are outputs from it.  @samp{=} identifies an output; @samp{+}
1530identifies an operand that is both input and output; all other operands
1531are assumed to be input only.
1532
1533If you specify @samp{=} or @samp{+} in a constraint, you put it in the
1534first character of the constraint string.
1535
1536@cindex @samp{&} in constraint
1537@cindex earlyclobber operand
1538@item &
1539Means (in a particular alternative) that this operand is an
1540@dfn{earlyclobber} operand, which is modified before the instruction is
1541finished using the input operands.  Therefore, this operand may not lie
1542in a register that is used as an input operand or as part of any memory
1543address.
1544
1545@samp{&} applies only to the alternative in which it is written.  In
1546constraints with multiple alternatives, sometimes one alternative
1547requires @samp{&} while others do not.  See, for example, the
1548@samp{movdf} insn of the 68000.
1549
1550An input operand can be tied to an earlyclobber operand if its only
1551use as an input occurs before the early result is written.  Adding
1552alternatives of this form often allows GCC to produce better code
1553when only some of the inputs can be affected by the earlyclobber.
1554See, for example, the @samp{mulsi3} insn of the ARM@.
1555
1556@samp{&} does not obviate the need to write @samp{=}.
1557
1558@cindex @samp{%} in constraint
1559@item %
1560Declares the instruction to be commutative for this operand and the
1561following operand.  This means that the compiler may interchange the
1562two operands if that is the cheapest way to make all operands fit the
1563constraints.
1564@ifset INTERNALS
1565This is often used in patterns for addition instructions
1566that really have only two operands: the result must go in one of the
1567arguments.  Here for example, is how the 68000 halfword-add
1568instruction is defined:
1569
1570@smallexample
1571(define_insn "addhi3"
1572  [(set (match_operand:HI 0 "general_operand" "=m,r")
1573     (plus:HI (match_operand:HI 1 "general_operand" "%0,0")
1574              (match_operand:HI 2 "general_operand" "di,g")))]
1575  @dots{})
1576@end smallexample
1577@end ifset
1578GCC can only handle one commutative pair in an asm; if you use more,
1579the compiler may fail.  Note that you need not use the modifier if
1580the two alternatives are strictly identical; this would only waste
1581time in the reload pass.  The modifier is not operational after
1582register allocation, so the result of @code{define_peephole2}
1583and @code{define_split}s performed after reload cannot rely on
1584@samp{%} to make the intended insn match.
1585
1586@cindex @samp{#} in constraint
1587@item #
1588Says that all following characters, up to the next comma, are to be
1589ignored as a constraint.  They are significant only for choosing
1590register preferences.
1591
1592@cindex @samp{*} in constraint
1593@item *
1594Says that the following character should be ignored when choosing
1595register preferences.  @samp{*} has no effect on the meaning of the
1596constraint as a constraint, and no effect on reloading.
1597
1598@ifset INTERNALS
1599Here is an example: the 68000 has an instruction to sign-extend a
1600halfword in a data register, and can also sign-extend a value by
1601copying it into an address register.  While either kind of register is
1602acceptable, the constraints on an address-register destination are
1603less strict, so it is best if register allocation makes an address
1604register its goal.  Therefore, @samp{*} is used so that the @samp{d}
1605constraint letter (for data register) is ignored when computing
1606register preferences.
1607
1608@smallexample
1609(define_insn "extendhisi2"
1610  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=*d,a")
1611        (sign_extend:SI
1612         (match_operand:HI 1 "general_operand" "0,g")))]
1613  @dots{})
1614@end smallexample
1615@end ifset
1616@end table
1617
1618@node Machine Constraints
1619@subsection Constraints for Particular Machines
1620@cindex machine specific constraints
1621@cindex constraints, machine specific
1622
1623Whenever possible, you should use the general-purpose constraint letters
1624in @code{asm} arguments, since they will convey meaning more readily to
1625people reading your code.  Failing that, use the constraint letters
1626that usually have very similar meanings across architectures.  The most
1627commonly used constraints are @samp{m} and @samp{r} (for memory and
1628general-purpose registers respectively; @pxref{Simple Constraints}), and
1629@samp{I}, usually the letter indicating the most common
1630immediate-constant format.
1631
1632Each architecture defines additional constraints.  These constraints
1633are used by the compiler itself for instruction generation, as well as
1634for @code{asm} statements; therefore, some of the constraints are not
1635particularly useful for @code{asm}.  Here is a summary of some of the
1636machine-dependent constraints available on some particular machines;
1637it includes both constraints that are useful for @code{asm} and
1638constraints that aren't.  The compiler source file mentioned in the
1639table heading for each architecture is the definitive reference for
1640the meanings of that architecture's constraints.
1641
1642@table @emph
1643@item ARM family---@file{config/arm/arm.h}
1644@table @code
1645@item f
1646Floating-point register
1647
1648@item w
1649VFP floating-point register
1650
1651@item F
1652One of the floating-point constants 0.0, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0
1653or 10.0
1654
1655@item G
1656Floating-point constant that would satisfy the constraint @samp{F} if it
1657were negated
1658
1659@item I
1660Integer that is valid as an immediate operand in a data processing
1661instruction.  That is, an integer in the range 0 to 255 rotated by a
1662multiple of 2
1663
1664@item J
1665Integer in the range @minus{}4095 to 4095
1666
1667@item K
1668Integer that satisfies constraint @samp{I} when inverted (ones complement)
1669
1670@item L
1671Integer that satisfies constraint @samp{I} when negated (twos complement)
1672
1673@item M
1674Integer in the range 0 to 32
1675
1676@item Q
1677A memory reference where the exact address is in a single register
1678(`@samp{m}' is preferable for @code{asm} statements)
1679
1680@item R
1681An item in the constant pool
1682
1683@item S
1684A symbol in the text segment of the current file
1685
1686@item Uv
1687A memory reference suitable for VFP load/store insns (reg+constant offset)
1688
1689@item Uy
1690A memory reference suitable for iWMMXt load/store instructions.
1691
1692@item Uq
1693A memory reference suitable for the ARMv4 ldrsb instruction.
1694@end table
1695
1696@item AVR family---@file{config/avr/constraints.md}
1697@table @code
1698@item l
1699Registers from r0 to r15
1700
1701@item a
1702Registers from r16 to r23
1703
1704@item d
1705Registers from r16 to r31
1706
1707@item w
1708Registers from r24 to r31.  These registers can be used in @samp{adiw} command
1709
1710@item e
1711Pointer register (r26--r31)
1712
1713@item b
1714Base pointer register (r28--r31)
1715
1716@item q
1717Stack pointer register (SPH:SPL)
1718
1719@item t
1720Temporary register r0
1721
1722@item x
1723Register pair X (r27:r26)
1724
1725@item y
1726Register pair Y (r29:r28)
1727
1728@item z
1729Register pair Z (r31:r30)
1730
1731@item I
1732Constant greater than @minus{}1, less than 64
1733
1734@item J
1735Constant greater than @minus{}64, less than 1
1736
1737@item K
1738Constant integer 2
1739
1740@item L
1741Constant integer 0
1742
1743@item M
1744Constant that fits in 8 bits
1745
1746@item N
1747Constant integer @minus{}1
1748
1749@item O
1750Constant integer 8, 16, or 24
1751
1752@item P
1753Constant integer 1
1754
1755@item G
1756A floating point constant 0.0
1757
1758@item R
1759Integer constant in the range @minus{}6 @dots{} 5.
1760
1761@item Q
1762A memory address based on Y or Z pointer with displacement.
1763@end table
1764
1765@item CRX Architecture---@file{config/crx/crx.h}
1766@table @code
1767
1768@item b
1769Registers from r0 to r14 (registers without stack pointer)
1770
1771@item l
1772Register r16 (64-bit accumulator lo register)
1773
1774@item h
1775Register r17 (64-bit accumulator hi register)
1776
1777@item k
1778Register pair r16-r17. (64-bit accumulator lo-hi pair)
1779
1780@item I
1781Constant that fits in 3 bits
1782
1783@item J
1784Constant that fits in 4 bits
1785
1786@item K
1787Constant that fits in 5 bits
1788
1789@item L
1790Constant that is one of @minus{}1, 4, @minus{}4, 7, 8, 12, 16, 20, 32, 48
1791
1792@item G
1793Floating point constant that is legal for store immediate
1794@end table
1795
1796@item Hewlett-Packard PA-RISC---@file{config/pa/pa.h}
1797@table @code
1798@item a
1799General register 1
1800
1801@item f
1802Floating point register
1803
1804@item q
1805Shift amount register
1806
1807@item x
1808Floating point register (deprecated)
1809
1810@item y
1811Upper floating point register (32-bit), floating point register (64-bit)
1812
1813@item Z
1814Any register
1815
1816@item I
1817Signed 11-bit integer constant
1818
1819@item J
1820Signed 14-bit integer constant
1821
1822@item K
1823Integer constant that can be deposited with a @code{zdepi} instruction
1824
1825@item L
1826Signed 5-bit integer constant
1827
1828@item M
1829Integer constant 0
1830
1831@item N
1832Integer constant that can be loaded with a @code{ldil} instruction
1833
1834@item O
1835Integer constant whose value plus one is a power of 2
1836
1837@item P
1838Integer constant that can be used for @code{and} operations in @code{depi}
1839and @code{extru} instructions
1840
1841@item S
1842Integer constant 31
1843
1844@item U
1845Integer constant 63
1846
1847@item G
1848Floating-point constant 0.0
1849
1850@item A
1851A @code{lo_sum} data-linkage-table memory operand
1852
1853@item Q
1854A memory operand that can be used as the destination operand of an
1855integer store instruction
1856
1857@item R
1858A scaled or unscaled indexed memory operand
1859
1860@item T
1861A memory operand for floating-point loads and stores
1862
1863@item W
1864A register indirect memory operand
1865@end table
1866
1867@item picoChip family---@file{picochip.h}
1868@table @code
1869@item k
1870Stack register.
1871
1872@item f
1873Pointer register.  A register which can be used to access memory without
1874supplying an offset.  Any other register can be used to access memory,
1875but will need a constant offset.  In the case of the offset being zero,
1876it is more efficient to use a pointer register, since this reduces code
1877size.
1878
1879@item t
1880A twin register.  A register which may be paired with an adjacent
1881register to create a 32-bit register.
1882
1883@item a
1884Any absolute memory address (e.g., symbolic constant, symbolic
1885constant + offset).
1886
1887@item I
18884-bit signed integer.
1889
1890@item J
18914-bit unsigned integer.
1892
1893@item K
18948-bit signed integer.
1895
1896@item M
1897Any constant whose absolute value is no greater than 4-bits.
1898
1899@item N
190010-bit signed integer
1901
1902@item O
190316-bit signed integer.
1904
1905@end table
1906
1907@item PowerPC and IBM RS6000---@file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h}
1908@table @code
1909@item b
1910Address base register
1911
1912@item d
1913Floating point register (containing 64-bit value)
1914
1915@item f
1916Floating point register (containing 32-bit value)
1917
1918@item v
1919Altivec vector register
1920
1921@item wd
1922VSX vector register to hold vector double data
1923
1924@item wf
1925VSX vector register to hold vector float data
1926
1927@item ws
1928VSX vector register to hold scalar float data
1929
1930@item wa
1931Any VSX register
1932
1933@item h
1934@samp{MQ}, @samp{CTR}, or @samp{LINK} register
1935
1936@item q
1937@samp{MQ} register
1938
1939@item c
1940@samp{CTR} register
1941
1942@item l
1943@samp{LINK} register
1944
1945@item x
1946@samp{CR} register (condition register) number 0
1947
1948@item y
1949@samp{CR} register (condition register)
1950
1951@item z
1952@samp{FPMEM} stack memory for FPR-GPR transfers
1953
1954@item I
1955Signed 16-bit constant
1956
1957@item J
1958Unsigned 16-bit constant shifted left 16 bits (use @samp{L} instead for
1959@code{SImode} constants)
1960
1961@item K
1962Unsigned 16-bit constant
1963
1964@item L
1965Signed 16-bit constant shifted left 16 bits
1966
1967@item M
1968Constant larger than 31
1969
1970@item N
1971Exact power of 2
1972
1973@item O
1974Zero
1975
1976@item P
1977Constant whose negation is a signed 16-bit constant
1978
1979@item G
1980Floating point constant that can be loaded into a register with one
1981instruction per word
1982
1983@item H
1984Integer/Floating point constant that can be loaded into a register using
1985three instructions
1986
1987@item m
1988Memory operand.  Note that on PowerPC targets, @code{m} can include
1989addresses that update the base register.  It is therefore only safe
1990to use @samp{m} in an @code{asm} statement if that @code{asm} statement
1991accesses the operand exactly once.  The @code{asm} statement must also
1992use @samp{%U@var{<opno>}} as a placeholder for the ``update'' flag in the
1993corresponding load or store instruction.  For example:
1994
1995@smallexample
1996asm ("st%U0 %1,%0" : "=m" (mem) : "r" (val));
1997@end smallexample
1998
1999is correct but:
2000
2001@smallexample
2002asm ("st %1,%0" : "=m" (mem) : "r" (val));
2003@end smallexample
2004
2005is not.  Use @code{es} rather than @code{m} if you don't want the
2006base register to be updated.
2007
2008@item es
2009A ``stable'' memory operand; that is, one which does not include any
2010automodification of the base register.  Unlike @samp{m}, this constraint
2011can be used in @code{asm} statements that might access the operand
2012several times, or that might not access it at all.
2013
2014@item Q
2015Memory operand that is an offset from a register (it is usually better
2016to use @samp{m} or @samp{es} in @code{asm} statements)
2017
2018@item Z
2019Memory operand that is an indexed or indirect from a register (it is
2020usually better to use @samp{m} or @samp{es} in @code{asm} statements)
2021
2022@item R
2023AIX TOC entry
2024
2025@item a
2026Address operand that is an indexed or indirect from a register (@samp{p} is
2027preferable for @code{asm} statements)
2028
2029@item S
2030Constant suitable as a 64-bit mask operand
2031
2032@item T
2033Constant suitable as a 32-bit mask operand
2034
2035@item U
2036System V Release 4 small data area reference
2037
2038@item t
2039AND masks that can be performed by two rldic@{l, r@} instructions
2040
2041@item W
2042Vector constant that does not require memory
2043
2044@item j
2045Vector constant that is all zeros.
2046
2047@end table
2048
2049@item Intel 386---@file{config/i386/constraints.md}
2050@table @code
2051@item R
2052Legacy register---the eight integer registers available on all
2053i386 processors (@code{a}, @code{b}, @code{c}, @code{d},
2054@code{si}, @code{di}, @code{bp}, @code{sp}).
2055
2056@item q
2057Any register accessible as @code{@var{r}l}.  In 32-bit mode, @code{a},
2058@code{b}, @code{c}, and @code{d}; in 64-bit mode, any integer register.
2059
2060@item Q
2061Any register accessible as @code{@var{r}h}: @code{a}, @code{b},
2062@code{c}, and @code{d}.
2063
2064@ifset INTERNALS
2065@item l
2066Any register that can be used as the index in a base+index memory
2067access: that is, any general register except the stack pointer.
2068@end ifset
2069
2070@item a
2071The @code{a} register.
2072
2073@item b
2074The @code{b} register.
2075
2076@item c
2077The @code{c} register.
2078
2079@item d
2080The @code{d} register.
2081
2082@item S
2083The @code{si} register.
2084
2085@item D
2086The @code{di} register.
2087
2088@item A
2089The @code{a} and @code{d} registers, as a pair (for instructions that
2090return half the result in one and half in the other).
2091
2092@item f
2093Any 80387 floating-point (stack) register.
2094
2095@item t
2096Top of 80387 floating-point stack (@code{%st(0)}).
2097
2098@item u
2099Second from top of 80387 floating-point stack (@code{%st(1)}).
2100
2101@item y
2102Any MMX register.
2103
2104@item x
2105Any SSE register.
2106
2107@item Yz
2108First SSE register (@code{%xmm0}).
2109
2110@ifset INTERNALS
2111@item Y2
2112Any SSE register, when SSE2 is enabled.
2113
2114@item Yi
2115Any SSE register, when SSE2 and inter-unit moves are enabled.
2116
2117@item Ym
2118Any MMX register, when inter-unit moves are enabled.
2119@end ifset
2120
2121@item I
2122Integer constant in the range 0 @dots{} 31, for 32-bit shifts.
2123
2124@item J
2125Integer constant in the range 0 @dots{} 63, for 64-bit shifts.
2126
2127@item K
2128Signed 8-bit integer constant.
2129
2130@item L
2131@code{0xFF} or @code{0xFFFF}, for andsi as a zero-extending move.
2132
2133@item M
21340, 1, 2, or 3 (shifts for the @code{lea} instruction).
2135
2136@item N
2137Unsigned 8-bit integer constant (for @code{in} and @code{out}
2138instructions).
2139
2140@ifset INTERNALS
2141@item O
2142Integer constant in the range 0 @dots{} 127, for 128-bit shifts.
2143@end ifset
2144
2145@item G
2146Standard 80387 floating point constant.
2147
2148@item C
2149Standard SSE floating point constant.
2150
2151@item e
215232-bit signed integer constant, or a symbolic reference known
2153to fit that range (for immediate operands in sign-extending x86-64
2154instructions).
2155
2156@item Z
215732-bit unsigned integer constant, or a symbolic reference known
2158to fit that range (for immediate operands in zero-extending x86-64
2159instructions).
2160
2161@end table
2162
2163@item Intel IA-64---@file{config/ia64/ia64.h}
2164@table @code
2165@item a
2166General register @code{r0} to @code{r3} for @code{addl} instruction
2167
2168@item b
2169Branch register
2170
2171@item c
2172Predicate register (@samp{c} as in ``conditional'')
2173
2174@item d
2175Application register residing in M-unit
2176
2177@item e
2178Application register residing in I-unit
2179
2180@item f
2181Floating-point register
2182
2183@item m
2184Memory operand.
2185Remember that @samp{m} allows postincrement and postdecrement which
2186require printing with @samp{%Pn} on IA-64.
2187Use @samp{S} to disallow postincrement and postdecrement.
2188
2189@item G
2190Floating-point constant 0.0 or 1.0
2191
2192@item I
219314-bit signed integer constant
2194
2195@item J
219622-bit signed integer constant
2197
2198@item K
21998-bit signed integer constant for logical instructions
2200
2201@item L
22028-bit adjusted signed integer constant for compare pseudo-ops
2203
2204@item M
22056-bit unsigned integer constant for shift counts
2206
2207@item N
22089-bit signed integer constant for load and store postincrements
2209
2210@item O
2211The constant zero
2212
2213@item P
22140 or @minus{}1 for @code{dep} instruction
2215
2216@item Q
2217Non-volatile memory for floating-point loads and stores
2218
2219@item R
2220Integer constant in the range 1 to 4 for @code{shladd} instruction
2221
2222@item S
2223Memory operand except postincrement and postdecrement
2224@end table
2225
2226@item FRV---@file{config/frv/frv.h}
2227@table @code
2228@item a
2229Register in the class @code{ACC_REGS} (@code{acc0} to @code{acc7}).
2230
2231@item b
2232Register in the class @code{EVEN_ACC_REGS} (@code{acc0} to @code{acc7}).
2233
2234@item c
2235Register in the class @code{CC_REGS} (@code{fcc0} to @code{fcc3} and
2236@code{icc0} to @code{icc3}).
2237
2238@item d
2239Register in the class @code{GPR_REGS} (@code{gr0} to @code{gr63}).
2240
2241@item e
2242Register in the class @code{EVEN_REGS} (@code{gr0} to @code{gr63}).
2243Odd registers are excluded not in the class but through the use of a machine
2244mode larger than 4 bytes.
2245
2246@item f
2247Register in the class @code{FPR_REGS} (@code{fr0} to @code{fr63}).
2248
2249@item h
2250Register in the class @code{FEVEN_REGS} (@code{fr0} to @code{fr63}).
2251Odd registers are excluded not in the class but through the use of a machine
2252mode larger than 4 bytes.
2253
2254@item l
2255Register in the class @code{LR_REG} (the @code{lr} register).
2256
2257@item q
2258Register in the class @code{QUAD_REGS} (@code{gr2} to @code{gr63}).
2259Register numbers not divisible by 4 are excluded not in the class but through
2260the use of a machine mode larger than 8 bytes.
2261
2262@item t
2263Register in the class @code{ICC_REGS} (@code{icc0} to @code{icc3}).
2264
2265@item u
2266Register in the class @code{FCC_REGS} (@code{fcc0} to @code{fcc3}).
2267
2268@item v
2269Register in the class @code{ICR_REGS} (@code{cc4} to @code{cc7}).
2270
2271@item w
2272Register in the class @code{FCR_REGS} (@code{cc0} to @code{cc3}).
2273
2274@item x
2275Register in the class @code{QUAD_FPR_REGS} (@code{fr0} to @code{fr63}).
2276Register numbers not divisible by 4 are excluded not in the class but through
2277the use of a machine mode larger than 8 bytes.
2278
2279@item z
2280Register in the class @code{SPR_REGS} (@code{lcr} and @code{lr}).
2281
2282@item A
2283Register in the class @code{QUAD_ACC_REGS} (@code{acc0} to @code{acc7}).
2284
2285@item B
2286Register in the class @code{ACCG_REGS} (@code{accg0} to @code{accg7}).
2287
2288@item C
2289Register in the class @code{CR_REGS} (@code{cc0} to @code{cc7}).
2290
2291@item G
2292Floating point constant zero
2293
2294@item I
22956-bit signed integer constant
2296
2297@item J
229810-bit signed integer constant
2299
2300@item L
230116-bit signed integer constant
2302
2303@item M
230416-bit unsigned integer constant
2305
2306@item N
230712-bit signed integer constant that is negative---i.e.@: in the
2308range of @minus{}2048 to @minus{}1
2309
2310@item O
2311Constant zero
2312
2313@item P
231412-bit signed integer constant that is greater than zero---i.e.@: in the
2315range of 1 to 2047.
2316
2317@end table
2318
2319@item Blackfin family---@file{config/bfin/constraints.md}
2320@table @code
2321@item a
2322P register
2323
2324@item d
2325D register
2326
2327@item z
2328A call clobbered P register.
2329
2330@item q@var{n}
2331A single register.  If @var{n} is in the range 0 to 7, the corresponding D
2332register.  If it is @code{A}, then the register P0.
2333
2334@item D
2335Even-numbered D register
2336
2337@item W
2338Odd-numbered D register
2339
2340@item e
2341Accumulator register.
2342
2343@item A
2344Even-numbered accumulator register.
2345
2346@item B
2347Odd-numbered accumulator register.
2348
2349@item b
2350I register
2351
2352@item v
2353B register
2354
2355@item f
2356M register
2357
2358@item c
2359Registers used for circular buffering, i.e. I, B, or L registers.
2360
2361@item C
2362The CC register.
2363
2364@item t
2365LT0 or LT1.
2366
2367@item k
2368LC0 or LC1.
2369
2370@item u
2371LB0 or LB1.
2372
2373@item x
2374Any D, P, B, M, I or L register.
2375
2376@item y
2377Additional registers typically used only in prologues and epilogues: RETS,
2378RETN, RETI, RETX, RETE, ASTAT, SEQSTAT and USP.
2379
2380@item w
2381Any register except accumulators or CC.
2382
2383@item Ksh
2384Signed 16 bit integer (in the range @minus{}32768 to 32767)
2385
2386@item Kuh
2387Unsigned 16 bit integer (in the range 0 to 65535)
2388
2389@item Ks7
2390Signed 7 bit integer (in the range @minus{}64 to 63)
2391
2392@item Ku7
2393Unsigned 7 bit integer (in the range 0 to 127)
2394
2395@item Ku5
2396Unsigned 5 bit integer (in the range 0 to 31)
2397
2398@item Ks4
2399Signed 4 bit integer (in the range @minus{}8 to 7)
2400
2401@item Ks3
2402Signed 3 bit integer (in the range @minus{}3 to 4)
2403
2404@item Ku3
2405Unsigned 3 bit integer (in the range 0 to 7)
2406
2407@item P@var{n}
2408Constant @var{n}, where @var{n} is a single-digit constant in the range 0 to 4.
2409
2410@item PA
2411An integer equal to one of the MACFLAG_XXX constants that is suitable for
2412use with either accumulator.
2413
2414@item PB
2415An integer equal to one of the MACFLAG_XXX constants that is suitable for
2416use only with accumulator A1.
2417
2418@item M1
2419Constant 255.
2420
2421@item M2
2422Constant 65535.
2423
2424@item J
2425An integer constant with exactly a single bit set.
2426
2427@item L
2428An integer constant with all bits set except exactly one.
2429
2430@item H
2431
2432@item Q
2433Any SYMBOL_REF.
2434@end table
2435
2436@item M32C---@file{config/m32c/m32c.c}
2437@table @code
2438@item Rsp
2439@itemx Rfb
2440@itemx Rsb
2441@samp{$sp}, @samp{$fb}, @samp{$sb}.
2442
2443@item Rcr
2444Any control register, when they're 16 bits wide (nothing if control
2445registers are 24 bits wide)
2446
2447@item Rcl
2448Any control register, when they're 24 bits wide.
2449
2450@item R0w
2451@itemx R1w
2452@itemx R2w
2453@itemx R3w
2454$r0, $r1, $r2, $r3.
2455
2456@item R02
2457$r0 or $r2, or $r2r0 for 32 bit values.
2458
2459@item R13
2460$r1 or $r3, or $r3r1 for 32 bit values.
2461
2462@item Rdi
2463A register that can hold a 64 bit value.
2464
2465@item Rhl
2466$r0 or $r1 (registers with addressable high/low bytes)
2467
2468@item R23
2469$r2 or $r3
2470
2471@item Raa
2472Address registers
2473
2474@item Raw
2475Address registers when they're 16 bits wide.
2476
2477@item Ral
2478Address registers when they're 24 bits wide.
2479
2480@item Rqi
2481Registers that can hold QI values.
2482
2483@item Rad
2484Registers that can be used with displacements ($a0, $a1, $sb).
2485
2486@item Rsi
2487Registers that can hold 32 bit values.
2488
2489@item Rhi
2490Registers that can hold 16 bit values.
2491
2492@item Rhc
2493Registers chat can hold 16 bit values, including all control
2494registers.
2495
2496@item Rra
2497$r0 through R1, plus $a0 and $a1.
2498
2499@item Rfl
2500The flags register.
2501
2502@item Rmm
2503The memory-based pseudo-registers $mem0 through $mem15.
2504
2505@item Rpi
2506Registers that can hold pointers (16 bit registers for r8c, m16c; 24
2507bit registers for m32cm, m32c).
2508
2509@item Rpa
2510Matches multiple registers in a PARALLEL to form a larger register.
2511Used to match function return values.
2512
2513@item Is3
2514@minus{}8 @dots{} 7
2515
2516@item IS1
2517@minus{}128 @dots{} 127
2518
2519@item IS2
2520@minus{}32768 @dots{} 32767
2521
2522@item IU2
25230 @dots{} 65535
2524
2525@item In4
2526@minus{}8 @dots{} @minus{}1 or 1 @dots{} 8
2527
2528@item In5
2529@minus{}16 @dots{} @minus{}1 or 1 @dots{} 16
2530
2531@item In6
2532@minus{}32 @dots{} @minus{}1 or 1 @dots{} 32
2533
2534@item IM2
2535@minus{}65536 @dots{} @minus{}1
2536
2537@item Ilb
2538An 8 bit value with exactly one bit set.
2539
2540@item Ilw
2541A 16 bit value with exactly one bit set.
2542
2543@item Sd
2544The common src/dest memory addressing modes.
2545
2546@item Sa
2547Memory addressed using $a0 or $a1.
2548
2549@item Si
2550Memory addressed with immediate addresses.
2551
2552@item Ss
2553Memory addressed using the stack pointer ($sp).
2554
2555@item Sf
2556Memory addressed using the frame base register ($fb).
2557
2558@item Ss
2559Memory addressed using the small base register ($sb).
2560
2561@item S1
2562$r1h
2563@end table
2564
2565@item MeP---@file{config/mep/constraints.md}
2566@table @code
2567
2568@item a
2569The $sp register.
2570
2571@item b
2572The $tp register.
2573
2574@item c
2575Any control register.
2576
2577@item d
2578Either the $hi or the $lo register.
2579
2580@item em
2581Coprocessor registers that can be directly loaded ($c0-$c15).
2582
2583@item ex
2584Coprocessor registers that can be moved to each other.
2585
2586@item er
2587Coprocessor registers that can be moved to core registers.
2588
2589@item h
2590The $hi register.
2591
2592@item j
2593The $rpc register.
2594
2595@item l
2596The $lo register.
2597
2598@item t
2599Registers which can be used in $tp-relative addressing.
2600
2601@item v
2602The $gp register.
2603
2604@item x
2605The coprocessor registers.
2606
2607@item y
2608The coprocessor control registers.
2609
2610@item z
2611The $0 register.
2612
2613@item A
2614User-defined register set A.
2615
2616@item B
2617User-defined register set B.
2618
2619@item C
2620User-defined register set C.
2621
2622@item D
2623User-defined register set D.
2624
2625@item I
2626Offsets for $gp-rel addressing.
2627
2628@item J
2629Constants that can be used directly with boolean insns.
2630
2631@item K
2632Constants that can be moved directly to registers.
2633
2634@item L
2635Small constants that can be added to registers.
2636
2637@item M
2638Long shift counts.
2639
2640@item N
2641Small constants that can be compared to registers.
2642
2643@item O
2644Constants that can be loaded into the top half of registers.
2645
2646@item S
2647Signed 8-bit immediates.
2648
2649@item T
2650Symbols encoded for $tp-rel or $gp-rel addressing.
2651
2652@item U
2653Non-constant addresses for loading/saving coprocessor registers.
2654
2655@item W
2656The top half of a symbol's value.
2657
2658@item Y
2659A register indirect address without offset.
2660
2661@item Z
2662Symbolic references to the control bus.
2663
2664
2665
2666@end table
2667
2668@item MIPS---@file{config/mips/constraints.md}
2669@table @code
2670@item d
2671An address register.  This is equivalent to @code{r} unless
2672generating MIPS16 code.
2673
2674@item f
2675A floating-point register (if available).
2676
2677@item h
2678Formerly the @code{hi} register.  This constraint is no longer supported.
2679
2680@item l
2681The @code{lo} register.  Use this register to store values that are
2682no bigger than a word.
2683
2684@item x
2685The concatenated @code{hi} and @code{lo} registers.  Use this register
2686to store doubleword values.
2687
2688@item c
2689A register suitable for use in an indirect jump.  This will always be
2690@code{$25} for @option{-mabicalls}.
2691
2692@item v
2693Register @code{$3}.  Do not use this constraint in new code;
2694it is retained only for compatibility with glibc.
2695
2696@item y
2697Equivalent to @code{r}; retained for backwards compatibility.
2698
2699@item z
2700A floating-point condition code register.
2701
2702@item I
2703A signed 16-bit constant (for arithmetic instructions).
2704
2705@item J
2706Integer zero.
2707
2708@item K
2709An unsigned 16-bit constant (for logic instructions).
2710
2711@item L
2712A signed 32-bit constant in which the lower 16 bits are zero.
2713Such constants can be loaded using @code{lui}.
2714
2715@item M
2716A constant that cannot be loaded using @code{lui}, @code{addiu}
2717or @code{ori}.
2718
2719@item N
2720A constant in the range @minus{}65535 to @minus{}1 (inclusive).
2721
2722@item O
2723A signed 15-bit constant.
2724
2725@item P
2726A constant in the range 1 to 65535 (inclusive).
2727
2728@item G
2729Floating-point zero.
2730
2731@item R
2732An address that can be used in a non-macro load or store.
2733@end table
2734
2735@item Motorola 680x0---@file{config/m68k/constraints.md}
2736@table @code
2737@item a
2738Address register
2739
2740@item d
2741Data register
2742
2743@item f
274468881 floating-point register, if available
2745
2746@item I
2747Integer in the range 1 to 8
2748
2749@item J
275016-bit signed number
2751
2752@item K
2753Signed number whose magnitude is greater than 0x80
2754
2755@item L
2756Integer in the range @minus{}8 to @minus{}1
2757
2758@item M
2759Signed number whose magnitude is greater than 0x100
2760
2761@item N
2762Range 24 to 31, rotatert:SI 8 to 1 expressed as rotate
2763
2764@item O
276516 (for rotate using swap)
2766
2767@item P
2768Range 8 to 15, rotatert:HI 8 to 1 expressed as rotate
2769
2770@item R
2771Numbers that mov3q can handle
2772
2773@item G
2774Floating point constant that is not a 68881 constant
2775
2776@item S
2777Operands that satisfy 'm' when -mpcrel is in effect
2778
2779@item T
2780Operands that satisfy 's' when -mpcrel is not in effect
2781
2782@item Q
2783Address register indirect addressing mode
2784
2785@item U
2786Register offset addressing
2787
2788@item W
2789const_call_operand
2790
2791@item Cs
2792symbol_ref or const
2793
2794@item Ci
2795const_int
2796
2797@item C0
2798const_int 0
2799
2800@item Cj
2801Range of signed numbers that don't fit in 16 bits
2802
2803@item Cmvq
2804Integers valid for mvq
2805
2806@item Capsw
2807Integers valid for a moveq followed by a swap
2808
2809@item Cmvz
2810Integers valid for mvz
2811
2812@item Cmvs
2813Integers valid for mvs
2814
2815@item Ap
2816push_operand
2817
2818@item Ac
2819Non-register operands allowed in clr
2820
2821@end table
2822
2823@item Motorola 68HC11 & 68HC12 families---@file{config/m68hc11/m68hc11.h}
2824@table @code
2825@item a
2826Register `a'
2827
2828@item b
2829Register `b'
2830
2831@item d
2832Register `d'
2833
2834@item q
2835An 8-bit register
2836
2837@item t
2838Temporary soft register _.tmp
2839
2840@item u
2841A soft register _.d1 to _.d31
2842
2843@item w
2844Stack pointer register
2845
2846@item x
2847Register `x'
2848
2849@item y
2850Register `y'
2851
2852@item z
2853Pseudo register `z' (replaced by `x' or `y' at the end)
2854
2855@item A
2856An address register: x, y or z
2857
2858@item B
2859An address register: x or y
2860
2861@item D
2862Register pair (x:d) to form a 32-bit value
2863
2864@item L
2865Constants in the range @minus{}65536 to 65535
2866
2867@item M
2868Constants whose 16-bit low part is zero
2869
2870@item N
2871Constant integer 1 or @minus{}1
2872
2873@item O
2874Constant integer 16
2875
2876@item P
2877Constants in the range @minus{}8 to 2
2878
2879@end table
2880
2881@item Moxie---@file{config/moxie/constraints.md}
2882@table @code
2883@item A
2884An absolute address
2885
2886@item B
2887An offset address
2888
2889@item W
2890A register indirect memory operand
2891
2892@item I
2893A constant in the range of 0 to 255.
2894
2895@item N
2896A constant in the range of 0 to @minus{}255.
2897
2898@end table
2899
2900@item RX---@file{config/rx/constraints.md}
2901@table @code
2902@item Q
2903An address which does not involve register indirect addressing or
2904pre/post increment/decrement addressing.
2905
2906@item Symbol
2907A symbol reference.
2908
2909@item Int08
2910A constant in the range @minus{}256 to 255, inclusive.
2911
2912@item Sint08
2913A constant in the range @minus{}128 to 127, inclusive.
2914
2915@item Sint16
2916A constant in the range @minus{}32768 to 32767, inclusive.
2917
2918@item Sint24
2919A constant in the range @minus{}8388608 to 8388607, inclusive.
2920
2921@item Uint04
2922A constant in the range 0 to 15, inclusive.
2923
2924@end table
2925
2926@need 1000
2927@item SPARC---@file{config/sparc/sparc.h}
2928@table @code
2929@item f
2930Floating-point register on the SPARC-V8 architecture and
2931lower floating-point register on the SPARC-V9 architecture.
2932
2933@item e
2934Floating-point register.  It is equivalent to @samp{f} on the
2935SPARC-V8 architecture and contains both lower and upper
2936floating-point registers on the SPARC-V9 architecture.
2937
2938@item c
2939Floating-point condition code register.
2940
2941@item d
2942Lower floating-point register.  It is only valid on the SPARC-V9
2943architecture when the Visual Instruction Set is available.
2944
2945@item b
2946Floating-point register.  It is only valid on the SPARC-V9 architecture
2947when the Visual Instruction Set is available.
2948
2949@item h
295064-bit global or out register for the SPARC-V8+ architecture.
2951
2952@item D
2953A vector constant
2954
2955@item I
2956Signed 13-bit constant
2957
2958@item J
2959Zero
2960
2961@item K
296232-bit constant with the low 12 bits clear (a constant that can be
2963loaded with the @code{sethi} instruction)
2964
2965@item L
2966A constant in the range supported by @code{movcc} instructions
2967
2968@item M
2969A constant in the range supported by @code{movrcc} instructions
2970
2971@item N
2972Same as @samp{K}, except that it verifies that bits that are not in the
2973lower 32-bit range are all zero.  Must be used instead of @samp{K} for
2974modes wider than @code{SImode}
2975
2976@item O
2977The constant 4096
2978
2979@item G
2980Floating-point zero
2981
2982@item H
2983Signed 13-bit constant, sign-extended to 32 or 64 bits
2984
2985@item Q
2986Floating-point constant whose integral representation can
2987be moved into an integer register using a single sethi
2988instruction
2989
2990@item R
2991Floating-point constant whose integral representation can
2992be moved into an integer register using a single mov
2993instruction
2994
2995@item S
2996Floating-point constant whose integral representation can
2997be moved into an integer register using a high/lo_sum
2998instruction sequence
2999
3000@item T
3001Memory address aligned to an 8-byte boundary
3002
3003@item U
3004Even register
3005
3006@item W
3007Memory address for @samp{e} constraint registers
3008
3009@item Y
3010Vector zero
3011
3012@end table
3013
3014@item SPU---@file{config/spu/spu.h}
3015@table @code
3016@item a
3017An immediate which can be loaded with the il/ila/ilh/ilhu instructions.  const_int is treated as a 64 bit value.
3018
3019@item c
3020An immediate for and/xor/or instructions.  const_int is treated as a 64 bit value.
3021
3022@item d
3023An immediate for the @code{iohl} instruction.  const_int is treated as a 64 bit value.
3024
3025@item f
3026An immediate which can be loaded with @code{fsmbi}.
3027
3028@item A
3029An immediate which can be loaded with the il/ila/ilh/ilhu instructions.  const_int is treated as a 32 bit value.
3030
3031@item B
3032An immediate for most arithmetic instructions.  const_int is treated as a 32 bit value.
3033
3034@item C
3035An immediate for and/xor/or instructions.  const_int is treated as a 32 bit value.
3036
3037@item D
3038An immediate for the @code{iohl} instruction.  const_int is treated as a 32 bit value.
3039
3040@item I
3041A constant in the range [@minus{}64, 63] for shift/rotate instructions.
3042
3043@item J
3044An unsigned 7-bit constant for conversion/nop/channel instructions.
3045
3046@item K
3047A signed 10-bit constant for most arithmetic instructions.
3048
3049@item M
3050A signed 16 bit immediate for @code{stop}.
3051
3052@item N
3053An unsigned 16-bit constant for @code{iohl} and @code{fsmbi}.
3054
3055@item O
3056An unsigned 7-bit constant whose 3 least significant bits are 0.
3057
3058@item P
3059An unsigned 3-bit constant for 16-byte rotates and shifts
3060
3061@item R
3062Call operand, reg, for indirect calls
3063
3064@item S
3065Call operand, symbol, for relative calls.
3066
3067@item T
3068Call operand, const_int, for absolute calls.
3069
3070@item U
3071An immediate which can be loaded with the il/ila/ilh/ilhu instructions.  const_int is sign extended to 128 bit.
3072
3073@item W
3074An immediate for shift and rotate instructions.  const_int is treated as a 32 bit value.
3075
3076@item Y
3077An immediate for and/xor/or instructions.  const_int is sign extended as a 128 bit.
3078
3079@item Z
3080An immediate for the @code{iohl} instruction.  const_int is sign extended to 128 bit.
3081
3082@end table
3083
3084@item S/390 and zSeries---@file{config/s390/s390.h}
3085@table @code
3086@item a
3087Address register (general purpose register except r0)
3088
3089@item c
3090Condition code register
3091
3092@item d
3093Data register (arbitrary general purpose register)
3094
3095@item f
3096Floating-point register
3097
3098@item I
3099Unsigned 8-bit constant (0--255)
3100
3101@item J
3102Unsigned 12-bit constant (0--4095)
3103
3104@item K
3105Signed 16-bit constant (@minus{}32768--32767)
3106
3107@item L
3108Value appropriate as displacement.
3109@table @code
3110@item (0..4095)
3111for short displacement
3112@item (@minus{}524288..524287)
3113for long displacement
3114@end table
3115
3116@item M
3117Constant integer with a value of 0x7fffffff.
3118
3119@item N
3120Multiple letter constraint followed by 4 parameter letters.
3121@table @code
3122@item 0..9:
3123number of the part counting from most to least significant
3124@item H,Q:
3125mode of the part
3126@item D,S,H:
3127mode of the containing operand
3128@item 0,F:
3129value of the other parts (F---all bits set)
3130@end table
3131The constraint matches if the specified part of a constant
3132has a value different from its other parts.
3133
3134@item Q
3135Memory reference without index register and with short displacement.
3136
3137@item R
3138Memory reference with index register and short displacement.
3139
3140@item S
3141Memory reference without index register but with long displacement.
3142
3143@item T
3144Memory reference with index register and long displacement.
3145
3146@item U
3147Pointer with short displacement.
3148
3149@item W
3150Pointer with long displacement.
3151
3152@item Y
3153Shift count operand.
3154
3155@end table
3156
3157@item Score family---@file{config/score/score.h}
3158@table @code
3159@item d
3160Registers from r0 to r32.
3161
3162@item e
3163Registers from r0 to r16.
3164
3165@item t
3166r8---r11 or r22---r27 registers.
3167
3168@item h
3169hi register.
3170
3171@item l
3172lo register.
3173
3174@item x
3175hi + lo register.
3176
3177@item q
3178cnt register.
3179
3180@item y
3181lcb register.
3182
3183@item z
3184scb register.
3185
3186@item a
3187cnt + lcb + scb register.
3188
3189@item c
3190cr0---cr15 register.
3191
3192@item b
3193cp1 registers.
3194
3195@item f
3196cp2 registers.
3197
3198@item i
3199cp3 registers.
3200
3201@item j
3202cp1 + cp2 + cp3 registers.
3203
3204@item I
3205High 16-bit constant (32-bit constant with 16 LSBs zero).
3206
3207@item J
3208Unsigned 5 bit integer (in the range 0 to 31).
3209
3210@item K
3211Unsigned 16 bit integer (in the range 0 to 65535).
3212
3213@item L
3214Signed 16 bit integer (in the range @minus{}32768 to 32767).
3215
3216@item M
3217Unsigned 14 bit integer (in the range 0 to 16383).
3218
3219@item N
3220Signed 14 bit integer (in the range @minus{}8192 to 8191).
3221
3222@item Z
3223Any SYMBOL_REF.
3224@end table
3225
3226@item Xstormy16---@file{config/stormy16/stormy16.h}
3227@table @code
3228@item a
3229Register r0.
3230
3231@item b
3232Register r1.
3233
3234@item c
3235Register r2.
3236
3237@item d
3238Register r8.
3239
3240@item e
3241Registers r0 through r7.
3242
3243@item t
3244Registers r0 and r1.
3245
3246@item y
3247The carry register.
3248
3249@item z
3250Registers r8 and r9.
3251
3252@item I
3253A constant between 0 and 3 inclusive.
3254
3255@item J
3256A constant that has exactly one bit set.
3257
3258@item K
3259A constant that has exactly one bit clear.
3260
3261@item L
3262A constant between 0 and 255 inclusive.
3263
3264@item M
3265A constant between @minus{}255 and 0 inclusive.
3266
3267@item N
3268A constant between @minus{}3 and 0 inclusive.
3269
3270@item O
3271A constant between 1 and 4 inclusive.
3272
3273@item P
3274A constant between @minus{}4 and @minus{}1 inclusive.
3275
3276@item Q
3277A memory reference that is a stack push.
3278
3279@item R
3280A memory reference that is a stack pop.
3281
3282@item S
3283A memory reference that refers to a constant address of known value.
3284
3285@item T
3286The register indicated by Rx (not implemented yet).
3287
3288@item U
3289A constant that is not between 2 and 15 inclusive.
3290
3291@item Z
3292The constant 0.
3293
3294@end table
3295
3296@item Xtensa---@file{config/xtensa/constraints.md}
3297@table @code
3298@item a
3299General-purpose 32-bit register
3300
3301@item b
3302One-bit boolean register
3303
3304@item A
3305MAC16 40-bit accumulator register
3306
3307@item I
3308Signed 12-bit integer constant, for use in MOVI instructions
3309
3310@item J
3311Signed 8-bit integer constant, for use in ADDI instructions
3312
3313@item K
3314Integer constant valid for BccI instructions
3315
3316@item L
3317Unsigned constant valid for BccUI instructions
3318
3319@end table
3320
3321@end table
3322
3323@ifset INTERNALS
3324@node Disable Insn Alternatives
3325@subsection Disable insn alternatives using the @code{enabled} attribute
3326@cindex enabled
3327
3328The @code{enabled} insn attribute may be used to disable certain insn
3329alternatives for machine-specific reasons.  This is useful when adding
3330new instructions to an existing pattern which are only available for
3331certain cpu architecture levels as specified with the @code{-march=}
3332option.
3333
3334If an insn alternative is disabled, then it will never be used.  The
3335compiler treats the constraints for the disabled alternative as
3336unsatisfiable.
3337
3338In order to make use of the @code{enabled} attribute a back end has to add
3339in the machine description files:
3340
3341@enumerate
3342@item
3343A definition of the @code{enabled} insn attribute.  The attribute is
3344defined as usual using the @code{define_attr} command.  This
3345definition should be based on other insn attributes and/or target flags.
3346The @code{enabled} attribute is a numeric attribute and should evaluate to
3347@code{(const_int 1)} for an enabled alternative and to
3348@code{(const_int 0)} otherwise.
3349@item
3350A definition of another insn attribute used to describe for what
3351reason an insn alternative might be available or
3352not.  E.g. @code{cpu_facility} as in the example below.
3353@item
3354An assignment for the second attribute to each insn definition
3355combining instructions which are not all available under the same
3356circumstances.  (Note: It obviously only makes sense for definitions
3357with more than one alternative.  Otherwise the insn pattern should be
3358disabled or enabled using the insn condition.)
3359@end enumerate
3360
3361E.g. the following two patterns could easily be merged using the @code{enabled}
3362attribute:
3363
3364@smallexample
3365
3366(define_insn "*movdi_old"
3367  [(set (match_operand:DI 0 "register_operand" "=d")
3368        (match_operand:DI 1 "register_operand" " d"))]
3369  "!TARGET_NEW"
3370  "lgr %0,%1")
3371
3372(define_insn "*movdi_new"
3373  [(set (match_operand:DI 0 "register_operand" "=d,f,d")
3374        (match_operand:DI 1 "register_operand" " d,d,f"))]
3375  "TARGET_NEW"
3376  "@@
3377   lgr  %0,%1
3378   ldgr %0,%1
3379   lgdr %0,%1")
3380
3381@end smallexample
3382
3383to:
3384
3385@smallexample
3386
3387(define_insn "*movdi_combined"
3388  [(set (match_operand:DI 0 "register_operand" "=d,f,d")
3389        (match_operand:DI 1 "register_operand" " d,d,f"))]
3390  ""
3391  "@@
3392   lgr  %0,%1
3393   ldgr %0,%1
3394   lgdr %0,%1"
3395  [(set_attr "cpu_facility" "*,new,new")])
3396
3397@end smallexample
3398
3399with the @code{enabled} attribute defined like this:
3400
3401@smallexample
3402
3403(define_attr "cpu_facility" "standard,new" (const_string "standard"))
3404
3405(define_attr "enabled" ""
3406  (cond [(eq_attr "cpu_facility" "standard") (const_int 1)
3407         (and (eq_attr "cpu_facility" "new")
3408              (ne (symbol_ref "TARGET_NEW") (const_int 0)))
3409         (const_int 1)]
3410        (const_int 0)))
3411
3412@end smallexample
3413
3414@end ifset
3415
3416@ifset INTERNALS
3417@node Define Constraints
3418@subsection Defining Machine-Specific Constraints
3419@cindex defining constraints
3420@cindex constraints, defining
3421
3422Machine-specific constraints fall into two categories: register and
3423non-register constraints.  Within the latter category, constraints
3424which allow subsets of all possible memory or address operands should
3425be specially marked, to give @code{reload} more information.
3426
3427Machine-specific constraints can be given names of arbitrary length,
3428but they must be entirely composed of letters, digits, underscores
3429(@samp{_}), and angle brackets (@samp{< >}).  Like C identifiers, they
3430must begin with a letter or underscore.
3431
3432In order to avoid ambiguity in operand constraint strings, no
3433constraint can have a name that begins with any other constraint's
3434name.  For example, if @code{x} is defined as a constraint name,
3435@code{xy} may not be, and vice versa.  As a consequence of this rule,
3436no constraint may begin with one of the generic constraint letters:
3437@samp{E F V X g i m n o p r s}.
3438
3439Register constraints correspond directly to register classes.
3440@xref{Register Classes}.  There is thus not much flexibility in their
3441definitions.
3442
3443@deffn {MD Expression} define_register_constraint name regclass docstring
3444All three arguments are string constants.
3445@var{name} is the name of the constraint, as it will appear in
3446@code{match_operand} expressions.  If @var{name} is a multi-letter
3447constraint its length shall be the same for all constraints starting
3448with the same letter.  @var{regclass} can be either the
3449name of the corresponding register class (@pxref{Register Classes}),
3450or a C expression which evaluates to the appropriate register class.
3451If it is an expression, it must have no side effects, and it cannot
3452look at the operand.  The usual use of expressions is to map some
3453register constraints to @code{NO_REGS} when the register class
3454is not available on a given subarchitecture.
3455
3456@var{docstring} is a sentence documenting the meaning of the
3457constraint.  Docstrings are explained further below.
3458@end deffn
3459
3460Non-register constraints are more like predicates: the constraint
3461definition gives a Boolean expression which indicates whether the
3462constraint matches.
3463
3464@deffn {MD Expression} define_constraint name docstring exp
3465The @var{name} and @var{docstring} arguments are the same as for
3466@code{define_register_constraint}, but note that the docstring comes
3467immediately after the name for these expressions.  @var{exp} is an RTL
3468expression, obeying the same rules as the RTL expressions in predicate
3469definitions.  @xref{Defining Predicates}, for details.  If it
3470evaluates true, the constraint matches; if it evaluates false, it
3471doesn't. Constraint expressions should indicate which RTL codes they
3472might match, just like predicate expressions.
3473
3474@code{match_test} C expressions have access to the
3475following variables:
3476
3477@table @var
3478@item op
3479The RTL object defining the operand.
3480@item mode
3481The machine mode of @var{op}.
3482@item ival
3483@samp{INTVAL (@var{op})}, if @var{op} is a @code{const_int}.
3484@item hval
3485@samp{CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (@var{op})}, if @var{op} is an integer
3486@code{const_double}.
3487@item lval
3488@samp{CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (@var{op})}, if @var{op} is an integer
3489@code{const_double}.
3490@item rval
3491@samp{CONST_DOUBLE_REAL_VALUE (@var{op})}, if @var{op} is a floating-point
3492@code{const_double}.
3493@end table
3494
3495The @var{*val} variables should only be used once another piece of the
3496expression has verified that @var{op} is the appropriate kind of RTL
3497object.
3498@end deffn
3499
3500Most non-register constraints should be defined with
3501@code{define_constraint}.  The remaining two definition expressions
3502are only appropriate for constraints that should be handled specially
3503by @code{reload} if they fail to match.
3504
3505@deffn {MD Expression} define_memory_constraint name docstring exp
3506Use this expression for constraints that match a subset of all memory
3507operands: that is, @code{reload} can make them match by converting the
3508operand to the form @samp{@w{(mem (reg @var{X}))}}, where @var{X} is a
3509base register (from the register class specified by
3510@code{BASE_REG_CLASS}, @pxref{Register Classes}).
3511
3512For example, on the S/390, some instructions do not accept arbitrary
3513memory references, but only those that do not make use of an index
3514register.  The constraint letter @samp{Q} is defined to represent a
3515memory address of this type.  If @samp{Q} is defined with
3516@code{define_memory_constraint}, a @samp{Q} constraint can handle any
3517memory operand, because @code{reload} knows it can simply copy the
3518memory address into a base register if required.  This is analogous to
3519the way an @samp{o} constraint can handle any memory operand.
3520
3521The syntax and semantics are otherwise identical to
3522@code{define_constraint}.
3523@end deffn
3524
3525@deffn {MD Expression} define_address_constraint name docstring exp
3526Use this expression for constraints that match a subset of all address
3527operands: that is, @code{reload} can make the constraint match by
3528converting the operand to the form @samp{@w{(reg @var{X})}}, again
3529with @var{X} a base register.
3530
3531Constraints defined with @code{define_address_constraint} can only be
3532used with the @code{address_operand} predicate, or machine-specific
3533predicates that work the same way.  They are treated analogously to
3534the generic @samp{p} constraint.
3535
3536The syntax and semantics are otherwise identical to
3537@code{define_constraint}.
3538@end deffn
3539
3540For historical reasons, names beginning with the letters @samp{G H}
3541are reserved for constraints that match only @code{const_double}s, and
3542names beginning with the letters @samp{I J K L M N O P} are reserved
3543for constraints that match only @code{const_int}s.  This may change in
3544the future.  For the time being, constraints with these names must be
3545written in a stylized form, so that @code{genpreds} can tell you did
3546it correctly:
3547
3548@smallexample
3549@group
3550(define_constraint "[@var{GHIJKLMNOP}]@dots{}"
3551  "@var{doc}@dots{}"
3552  (and (match_code "const_int")  ; @r{@code{const_double} for G/H}
3553       @var{condition}@dots{}))            ; @r{usually a @code{match_test}}
3554@end group
3555@end smallexample
3556@c the semicolons line up in the formatted manual
3557
3558It is fine to use names beginning with other letters for constraints
3559that match @code{const_double}s or @code{const_int}s.
3560
3561Each docstring in a constraint definition should be one or more complete
3562sentences, marked up in Texinfo format.  @emph{They are currently unused.}
3563In the future they will be copied into the GCC manual, in @ref{Machine
3564Constraints}, replacing the hand-maintained tables currently found in
3565that section.  Also, in the future the compiler may use this to give
3566more helpful diagnostics when poor choice of @code{asm} constraints
3567causes a reload failure.
3568
3569If you put the pseudo-Texinfo directive @samp{@@internal} at the
3570beginning of a docstring, then (in the future) it will appear only in
3571the internals manual's version of the machine-specific constraint tables.
3572Use this for constraints that should not appear in @code{asm} statements.
3573
3574@node C Constraint Interface
3575@subsection Testing constraints from C
3576@cindex testing constraints
3577@cindex constraints, testing
3578
3579It is occasionally useful to test a constraint from C code rather than
3580implicitly via the constraint string in a @code{match_operand}.  The
3581generated file @file{tm_p.h} declares a few interfaces for working
3582with machine-specific constraints.  None of these interfaces work with
3583the generic constraints described in @ref{Simple Constraints}.  This
3584may change in the future.
3585
3586@strong{Warning:} @file{tm_p.h} may declare other functions that
3587operate on constraints, besides the ones documented here.  Do not use
3588those functions from machine-dependent code.  They exist to implement
3589the old constraint interface that machine-independent components of
3590the compiler still expect.  They will change or disappear in the
3591future.
3592
3593Some valid constraint names are not valid C identifiers, so there is a
3594mangling scheme for referring to them from C@.  Constraint names that
3595do not contain angle brackets or underscores are left unchanged.
3596Underscores are doubled, each @samp{<} is replaced with @samp{_l}, and
3597each @samp{>} with @samp{_g}.  Here are some examples:
3598
3599@c the @c's prevent double blank lines in the printed manual.
3600@example
3601@multitable {Original} {Mangled}
3602@item @strong{Original} @tab @strong{Mangled}  @c
3603@item @code{x}     @tab @code{x}       @c
3604@item @code{P42x}  @tab @code{P42x}    @c
3605@item @code{P4_x}  @tab @code{P4__x}   @c
3606@item @code{P4>x}  @tab @code{P4_gx}   @c
3607@item @code{P4>>}  @tab @code{P4_g_g}  @c
3608@item @code{P4_g>} @tab @code{P4__g_g} @c
3609@end multitable
3610@end example
3611
3612Throughout this section, the variable @var{c} is either a constraint
3613in the abstract sense, or a constant from @code{enum constraint_num};
3614the variable @var{m} is a mangled constraint name (usually as part of
3615a larger identifier).
3616
3617@deftp Enum constraint_num
3618For each machine-specific constraint, there is a corresponding
3619enumeration constant: @samp{CONSTRAINT_} plus the mangled name of the
3620constraint.  Functions that take an @code{enum constraint_num} as an
3621argument expect one of these constants.
3622
3623Machine-independent constraints do not have associated constants.
3624This may change in the future.
3625@end deftp
3626
3627@deftypefun {inline bool} satisfies_constraint_@var{m} (rtx @var{exp})
3628For each machine-specific, non-register constraint @var{m}, there is
3629one of these functions; it returns @code{true} if @var{exp} satisfies the
3630constraint.  These functions are only visible if @file{rtl.h} was included
3631before @file{tm_p.h}.
3632@end deftypefun
3633
3634@deftypefun bool constraint_satisfied_p (rtx @var{exp}, enum constraint_num @var{c})
3635Like the @code{satisfies_constraint_@var{m}} functions, but the
3636constraint to test is given as an argument, @var{c}.  If @var{c}
3637specifies a register constraint, this function will always return
3638@code{false}.
3639@end deftypefun
3640
3641@deftypefun {enum reg_class} regclass_for_constraint (enum constraint_num @var{c})
3642Returns the register class associated with @var{c}.  If @var{c} is not
3643a register constraint, or those registers are not available for the
3644currently selected subtarget, returns @code{NO_REGS}.
3645@end deftypefun
3646
3647Here is an example use of @code{satisfies_constraint_@var{m}}.  In
3648peephole optimizations (@pxref{Peephole Definitions}), operand
3649constraint strings are ignored, so if there are relevant constraints,
3650they must be tested in the C condition.  In the example, the
3651optimization is applied if operand 2 does @emph{not} satisfy the
3652@samp{K} constraint.  (This is a simplified version of a peephole
3653definition from the i386 machine description.)
3654
3655@smallexample
3656(define_peephole2
3657  [(match_scratch:SI 3 "r")
3658   (set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "")
3659        (mult:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "memory_operand" "")
3660                 (match_operand:SI 2 "immediate_operand" "")))]
3661
3662  "!satisfies_constraint_K (operands[2])"
3663
3664  [(set (match_dup 3) (match_dup 1))
3665   (set (match_dup 0) (mult:SI (match_dup 3) (match_dup 2)))]
3666
3667  "")
3668@end smallexample
3669
3670@node Standard Names
3671@section Standard Pattern Names For Generation
3672@cindex standard pattern names
3673@cindex pattern names
3674@cindex names, pattern
3675
3676Here is a table of the instruction names that are meaningful in the RTL
3677generation pass of the compiler.  Giving one of these names to an
3678instruction pattern tells the RTL generation pass that it can use the
3679pattern to accomplish a certain task.
3680
3681@table @asis
3682@cindex @code{mov@var{m}} instruction pattern
3683@item @samp{mov@var{m}}
3684Here @var{m} stands for a two-letter machine mode name, in lowercase.
3685This instruction pattern moves data with that machine mode from operand
36861 to operand 0.  For example, @samp{movsi} moves full-word data.
3687
3688If operand 0 is a @code{subreg} with mode @var{m} of a register whose
3689own mode is wider than @var{m}, the effect of this instruction is
3690to store the specified value in the part of the register that corresponds
3691to mode @var{m}.  Bits outside of @var{m}, but which are within the
3692same target word as the @code{subreg} are undefined.  Bits which are
3693outside the target word are left unchanged.
3694
3695This class of patterns is special in several ways.  First of all, each
3696of these names up to and including full word size @emph{must} be defined,
3697because there is no other way to copy a datum from one place to another.
3698If there are patterns accepting operands in larger modes,
3699@samp{mov@var{m}} must be defined for integer modes of those sizes.
3700
3701Second, these patterns are not used solely in the RTL generation pass.
3702Even the reload pass can generate move insns to copy values from stack
3703slots into temporary registers.  When it does so, one of the operands is
3704a hard register and the other is an operand that can need to be reloaded
3705into a register.
3706
3707@findex force_reg
3708Therefore, when given such a pair of operands, the pattern must generate
3709RTL which needs no reloading and needs no temporary registers---no
3710registers other than the operands.  For example, if you support the
3711pattern with a @code{define_expand}, then in such a case the
3712@code{define_expand} mustn't call @code{force_reg} or any other such
3713function which might generate new pseudo registers.
3714
3715This requirement exists even for subword modes on a RISC machine where
3716fetching those modes from memory normally requires several insns and
3717some temporary registers.
3718
3719@findex change_address
3720During reload a memory reference with an invalid address may be passed
3721as an operand.  Such an address will be replaced with a valid address
3722later in the reload pass.  In this case, nothing may be done with the
3723address except to use it as it stands.  If it is copied, it will not be
3724replaced with a valid address.  No attempt should be made to make such
3725an address into a valid address and no routine (such as
3726@code{change_address}) that will do so may be called.  Note that
3727@code{general_operand} will fail when applied to such an address.
3728
3729@findex reload_in_progress
3730The global variable @code{reload_in_progress} (which must be explicitly
3731declared if required) can be used to determine whether such special
3732handling is required.
3733
3734The variety of operands that have reloads depends on the rest of the
3735machine description, but typically on a RISC machine these can only be
3736pseudo registers that did not get hard registers, while on other
3737machines explicit memory references will get optional reloads.
3738
3739If a scratch register is required to move an object to or from memory,
3740it can be allocated using @code{gen_reg_rtx} prior to life analysis.
3741
3742If there are cases which need scratch registers during or after reload,
3743you must provide an appropriate secondary_reload target hook.
3744
3745@findex can_create_pseudo_p
3746The macro @code{can_create_pseudo_p} can be used to determine if it
3747is unsafe to create new pseudo registers.  If this variable is nonzero, then
3748it is unsafe to call @code{gen_reg_rtx} to allocate a new pseudo.
3749
3750The constraints on a @samp{mov@var{m}} must permit moving any hard
3751register to any other hard register provided that
3752@code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} permits mode @var{m} in both registers and
3753@code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their classes returns a value of 2.
3754
3755It is obligatory to support floating point @samp{mov@var{m}}
3756instructions into and out of any registers that can hold fixed point
3757values, because unions and structures (which have modes @code{SImode} or
3758@code{DImode}) can be in those registers and they may have floating
3759point members.
3760
3761There may also be a need to support fixed point @samp{mov@var{m}}
3762instructions in and out of floating point registers.  Unfortunately, I
3763have forgotten why this was so, and I don't know whether it is still
3764true.  If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} rejects fixed point values in
3765floating point registers, then the constraints of the fixed point
3766@samp{mov@var{m}} instructions must be designed to avoid ever trying to
3767reload into a floating point register.
3768
3769@cindex @code{reload_in} instruction pattern
3770@cindex @code{reload_out} instruction pattern
3771@item @samp{reload_in@var{m}}
3772@itemx @samp{reload_out@var{m}}
3773These named patterns have been obsoleted by the target hook
3774@code{secondary_reload}.
3775
3776Like @samp{mov@var{m}}, but used when a scratch register is required to
3777move between operand 0 and operand 1.  Operand 2 describes the scratch
3778register.  See the discussion of the @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS}
3779macro in @pxref{Register Classes}.
3780
3781There are special restrictions on the form of the @code{match_operand}s
3782used in these patterns.  First, only the predicate for the reload
3783operand is examined, i.e., @code{reload_in} examines operand 1, but not
3784the predicates for operand 0 or 2.  Second, there may be only one
3785alternative in the constraints.  Third, only a single register class
3786letter may be used for the constraint; subsequent constraint letters
3787are ignored.  As a special exception, an empty constraint string
3788matches the @code{ALL_REGS} register class.  This may relieve ports
3789of the burden of defining an @code{ALL_REGS} constraint letter just
3790for these patterns.
3791
3792@cindex @code{movstrict@var{m}} instruction pattern
3793@item @samp{movstrict@var{m}}
3794Like @samp{mov@var{m}} except that if operand 0 is a @code{subreg}
3795with mode @var{m} of a register whose natural mode is wider,
3796the @samp{movstrict@var{m}} instruction is guaranteed not to alter
3797any of the register except the part which belongs to mode @var{m}.
3798
3799@cindex @code{movmisalign@var{m}} instruction pattern
3800@item @samp{movmisalign@var{m}}
3801This variant of a move pattern is designed to load or store a value
3802from a memory address that is not naturally aligned for its mode.
3803For a store, the memory will be in operand 0; for a load, the memory
3804will be in operand 1.  The other operand is guaranteed not to be a
3805memory, so that it's easy to tell whether this is a load or store.
3806
3807This pattern is used by the autovectorizer, and when expanding a
3808@code{MISALIGNED_INDIRECT_REF} expression.
3809
3810@cindex @code{load_multiple} instruction pattern
3811@item @samp{load_multiple}
3812Load several consecutive memory locations into consecutive registers.
3813Operand 0 is the first of the consecutive registers, operand 1
3814is the first memory location, and operand 2 is a constant: the
3815number of consecutive registers.
3816
3817Define this only if the target machine really has such an instruction;
3818do not define this if the most efficient way of loading consecutive
3819registers from memory is to do them one at a time.
3820
3821On some machines, there are restrictions as to which consecutive
3822registers can be stored into memory, such as particular starting or
3823ending register numbers or only a range of valid counts.  For those
3824machines, use a @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions})
3825and make the pattern fail if the restrictions are not met.
3826
3827Write the generated insn as a @code{parallel} with elements being a
3828@code{set} of one register from the appropriate memory location (you may
3829also need @code{use} or @code{clobber} elements).  Use a
3830@code{match_parallel} (@pxref{RTL Template}) to recognize the insn.  See
3831@file{rs6000.md} for examples of the use of this insn pattern.
3832
3833@cindex @samp{store_multiple} instruction pattern
3834@item @samp{store_multiple}
3835Similar to @samp{load_multiple}, but store several consecutive registers
3836into consecutive memory locations.  Operand 0 is the first of the
3837consecutive memory locations, operand 1 is the first register, and
3838operand 2 is a constant: the number of consecutive registers.
3839
3840@cindex @code{vec_set@var{m}} instruction pattern
3841@item @samp{vec_set@var{m}}
3842Set given field in the vector value.  Operand 0 is the vector to modify,
3843operand 1 is new value of field and operand 2 specify the field index.
3844
3845@cindex @code{vec_extract@var{m}} instruction pattern
3846@item @samp{vec_extract@var{m}}
3847Extract given field from the vector value.  Operand 1 is the vector, operand 2
3848specify field index and operand 0 place to store value into.
3849
3850@cindex @code{vec_extract_even@var{m}} instruction pattern
3851@item @samp{vec_extract_even@var{m}}
3852Extract even elements from the input vectors (operand 1 and operand 2).
3853The even elements of operand 2 are concatenated to the even elements of operand
38541 in their original order. The result is stored in operand 0.
3855The output and input vectors should have the same modes.
3856
3857@cindex @code{vec_extract_odd@var{m}} instruction pattern
3858@item @samp{vec_extract_odd@var{m}}
3859Extract odd elements from the input vectors (operand 1 and operand 2).
3860The odd elements of operand 2 are concatenated to the odd elements of operand
38611 in their original order. The result is stored in operand 0.
3862The output and input vectors should have the same modes.
3863
3864@cindex @code{vec_interleave_high@var{m}} instruction pattern
3865@item @samp{vec_interleave_high@var{m}}
3866Merge high elements of the two input vectors into the output vector. The output
3867and input vectors should have the same modes (@code{N} elements). The high
3868@code{N/2} elements of the first input vector are interleaved with the high
3869@code{N/2} elements of the second input vector.
3870
3871@cindex @code{vec_interleave_low@var{m}} instruction pattern
3872@item @samp{vec_interleave_low@var{m}}
3873Merge low elements of the two input vectors into the output vector. The output
3874and input vectors should have the same modes (@code{N} elements). The low
3875@code{N/2} elements of the first input vector are interleaved with the low
3876@code{N/2} elements of the second input vector.
3877
3878@cindex @code{vec_init@var{m}} instruction pattern
3879@item @samp{vec_init@var{m}}
3880Initialize the vector to given values.  Operand 0 is the vector to initialize
3881and operand 1 is parallel containing values for individual fields.
3882
3883@cindex @code{push@var{m}1} instruction pattern
3884@item @samp{push@var{m}1}
3885Output a push instruction.  Operand 0 is value to push.  Used only when
3886@code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is defined.  For historical reason, this pattern may be
3887missing and in such case an @code{mov} expander is used instead, with a
3888@code{MEM} expression forming the push operation.  The @code{mov} expander
3889method is deprecated.
3890
3891@cindex @code{add@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3892@item @samp{add@var{m}3}
3893Add operand 2 and operand 1, storing the result in operand 0.  All operands
3894must have mode @var{m}.  This can be used even on two-address machines, by
3895means of constraints requiring operands 1 and 0 to be the same location.
3896
3897@cindex @code{ssadd@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3898@cindex @code{usadd@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3899@cindex @code{sub@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3900@cindex @code{sssub@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3901@cindex @code{ussub@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3902@cindex @code{mul@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3903@cindex @code{ssmul@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3904@cindex @code{usmul@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3905@cindex @code{div@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3906@cindex @code{ssdiv@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3907@cindex @code{udiv@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3908@cindex @code{usdiv@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3909@cindex @code{mod@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3910@cindex @code{umod@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3911@cindex @code{umin@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3912@cindex @code{umax@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3913@cindex @code{and@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3914@cindex @code{ior@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3915@cindex @code{xor@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3916@item @samp{ssadd@var{m}3}, @samp{usadd@var{m}3}
3917@item @samp{sub@var{m}3}, @samp{sssub@var{m}3}, @samp{ussub@var{m}3}
3918@item @samp{mul@var{m}3}, @samp{ssmul@var{m}3}, @samp{usmul@var{m}3}
3919@itemx @samp{div@var{m}3}, @samp{ssdiv@var{m}3}
3920@itemx @samp{udiv@var{m}3}, @samp{usdiv@var{m}3}
3921@itemx @samp{mod@var{m}3}, @samp{umod@var{m}3}
3922@itemx @samp{umin@var{m}3}, @samp{umax@var{m}3}
3923@itemx @samp{and@var{m}3}, @samp{ior@var{m}3}, @samp{xor@var{m}3}
3924Similar, for other arithmetic operations.
3925
3926@cindex @code{min@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3927@cindex @code{max@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3928@item @samp{smin@var{m}3}, @samp{smax@var{m}3}
3929Signed minimum and maximum operations.  When used with floating point,
3930if both operands are zeros, or if either operand is @code{NaN}, then
3931it is unspecified which of the two operands is returned as the result.
3932
3933@cindex @code{reduc_smin_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3934@cindex @code{reduc_smax_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3935@item @samp{reduc_smin_@var{m}}, @samp{reduc_smax_@var{m}}
3936Find the signed minimum/maximum of the elements of a vector. The vector is
3937operand 1, and the scalar result is stored in the least significant bits of
3938operand 0 (also a vector). The output and input vector should have the same
3939modes.
3940
3941@cindex @code{reduc_umin_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3942@cindex @code{reduc_umax_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3943@item @samp{reduc_umin_@var{m}}, @samp{reduc_umax_@var{m}}
3944Find the unsigned minimum/maximum of the elements of a vector. The vector is
3945operand 1, and the scalar result is stored in the least significant bits of
3946operand 0 (also a vector). The output and input vector should have the same
3947modes.
3948
3949@cindex @code{reduc_splus_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3950@item @samp{reduc_splus_@var{m}}
3951Compute the sum of the signed elements of a vector. The vector is operand 1,
3952and the scalar result is stored in the least significant bits of operand 0
3953(also a vector). The output and input vector should have the same modes.
3954
3955@cindex @code{reduc_uplus_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3956@item @samp{reduc_uplus_@var{m}}
3957Compute the sum of the unsigned elements of a vector. The vector is operand 1,
3958and the scalar result is stored in the least significant bits of operand 0
3959(also a vector). The output and input vector should have the same modes.
3960
3961@cindex @code{sdot_prod@var{m}} instruction pattern
3962@item @samp{sdot_prod@var{m}}
3963@cindex @code{udot_prod@var{m}} instruction pattern
3964@item @samp{udot_prod@var{m}}
3965Compute the sum of the products of two signed/unsigned elements.
3966Operand 1 and operand 2 are of the same mode. Their product, which is of a
3967wider mode, is computed and added to operand 3. Operand 3 is of a mode equal or
3968wider than the mode of the product. The result is placed in operand 0, which
3969is of the same mode as operand 3.
3970
3971@cindex @code{ssum_widen@var{m3}} instruction pattern
3972@item @samp{ssum_widen@var{m3}}
3973@cindex @code{usum_widen@var{m3}} instruction pattern
3974@item @samp{usum_widen@var{m3}}
3975Operands 0 and 2 are of the same mode, which is wider than the mode of
3976operand 1. Add operand 1 to operand 2 and place the widened result in
3977operand 0. (This is used express accumulation of elements into an accumulator
3978of a wider mode.)
3979
3980@cindex @code{vec_shl_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3981@cindex @code{vec_shr_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3982@item @samp{vec_shl_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_shr_@var{m}}
3983Whole vector left/right shift in bits.
3984Operand 1 is a vector to be shifted.
3985Operand 2 is an integer shift amount in bits.
3986Operand 0 is where the resulting shifted vector is stored.
3987The output and input vectors should have the same modes.
3988
3989@cindex @code{vec_pack_trunc_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3990@item @samp{vec_pack_trunc_@var{m}}
3991Narrow (demote) and merge the elements of two vectors. Operands 1 and 2
3992are vectors of the same mode having N integral or floating point elements
3993of size S@.  Operand 0 is the resulting vector in which 2*N elements of
3994size N/2 are concatenated after narrowing them down using truncation.
3995
3996@cindex @code{vec_pack_ssat_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3997@cindex @code{vec_pack_usat_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3998@item @samp{vec_pack_ssat_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_pack_usat_@var{m}}
3999Narrow (demote) and merge the elements of two vectors.  Operands 1 and 2
4000are vectors of the same mode having N integral elements of size S.
4001Operand 0 is the resulting vector in which the elements of the two input
4002vectors are concatenated after narrowing them down using signed/unsigned
4003saturating arithmetic.
4004
4005@cindex @code{vec_pack_sfix_trunc_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4006@cindex @code{vec_pack_ufix_trunc_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4007@item @samp{vec_pack_sfix_trunc_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_pack_ufix_trunc_@var{m}}
4008Narrow, convert to signed/unsigned integral type and merge the elements
4009of two vectors.  Operands 1 and 2 are vectors of the same mode having N
4010floating point elements of size S@.  Operand 0 is the resulting vector
4011in which 2*N elements of size N/2 are concatenated.
4012
4013@cindex @code{vec_unpacks_hi_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4014@cindex @code{vec_unpacks_lo_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4015@item @samp{vec_unpacks_hi_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_unpacks_lo_@var{m}}
4016Extract and widen (promote) the high/low part of a vector of signed
4017integral or floating point elements.  The input vector (operand 1) has N
4018elements of size S@.  Widen (promote) the high/low elements of the vector
4019using signed or floating point extension and place the resulting N/2
4020values of size 2*S in the output vector (operand 0).
4021
4022@cindex @code{vec_unpacku_hi_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4023@cindex @code{vec_unpacku_lo_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4024@item @samp{vec_unpacku_hi_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_unpacku_lo_@var{m}}
4025Extract and widen (promote) the high/low part of a vector of unsigned
4026integral elements.  The input vector (operand 1) has N elements of size S.
4027Widen (promote) the high/low elements of the vector using zero extension and
4028place the resulting N/2 values of size 2*S in the output vector (operand 0).
4029
4030@cindex @code{vec_unpacks_float_hi_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4031@cindex @code{vec_unpacks_float_lo_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4032@cindex @code{vec_unpacku_float_hi_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4033@cindex @code{vec_unpacku_float_lo_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4034@item @samp{vec_unpacks_float_hi_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_unpacks_float_lo_@var{m}}
4035@itemx @samp{vec_unpacku_float_hi_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_unpacku_float_lo_@var{m}}
4036Extract, convert to floating point type and widen the high/low part of a
4037vector of signed/unsigned integral elements.  The input vector (operand 1)
4038has N elements of size S@.  Convert the high/low elements of the vector using
4039floating point conversion and place the resulting N/2 values of size 2*S in
4040the output vector (operand 0).
4041
4042@cindex @code{vec_widen_umult_hi_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4043@cindex @code{vec_widen_umult_lo__@var{m}} instruction pattern
4044@cindex @code{vec_widen_smult_hi_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4045@cindex @code{vec_widen_smult_lo_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4046@item @samp{vec_widen_umult_hi_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_widen_umult_lo_@var{m}}
4047@itemx @samp{vec_widen_smult_hi_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_widen_smult_lo_@var{m}}
4048Signed/Unsigned widening multiplication.  The two inputs (operands 1 and 2)
4049are vectors with N signed/unsigned elements of size S@.  Multiply the high/low
4050elements of the two vectors, and put the N/2 products of size 2*S in the
4051output vector (operand 0).
4052
4053@cindex @code{mulhisi3} instruction pattern
4054@item @samp{mulhisi3}
4055Multiply operands 1 and 2, which have mode @code{HImode}, and store
4056a @code{SImode} product in operand 0.
4057
4058@cindex @code{mulqihi3} instruction pattern
4059@cindex @code{mulsidi3} instruction pattern
4060@item @samp{mulqihi3}, @samp{mulsidi3}
4061Similar widening-multiplication instructions of other widths.
4062
4063@cindex @code{umulqihi3} instruction pattern
4064@cindex @code{umulhisi3} instruction pattern
4065@cindex @code{umulsidi3} instruction pattern
4066@item @samp{umulqihi3}, @samp{umulhisi3}, @samp{umulsidi3}
4067Similar widening-multiplication instructions that do unsigned
4068multiplication.
4069
4070@cindex @code{usmulqihi3} instruction pattern
4071@cindex @code{usmulhisi3} instruction pattern
4072@cindex @code{usmulsidi3} instruction pattern
4073@item @samp{usmulqihi3}, @samp{usmulhisi3}, @samp{usmulsidi3}
4074Similar widening-multiplication instructions that interpret the first
4075operand as unsigned and the second operand as signed, then do a signed
4076multiplication.
4077
4078@cindex @code{smul@var{m}3_highpart} instruction pattern
4079@item @samp{smul@var{m}3_highpart}
4080Perform a signed multiplication of operands 1 and 2, which have mode
4081@var{m}, and store the most significant half of the product in operand 0.
4082The least significant half of the product is discarded.
4083
4084@cindex @code{umul@var{m}3_highpart} instruction pattern
4085@item @samp{umul@var{m}3_highpart}
4086Similar, but the multiplication is unsigned.
4087
4088@cindex @code{madd@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern
4089@item @samp{madd@var{m}@var{n}4}
4090Multiply operands 1 and 2, sign-extend them to mode @var{n}, add
4091operand 3, and store the result in operand 0.  Operands 1 and 2
4092have mode @var{m} and operands 0 and 3 have mode @var{n}.
4093Both modes must be integer or fixed-point modes and @var{n} must be twice
4094the size of @var{m}.
4095
4096In other words, @code{madd@var{m}@var{n}4} is like
4097@code{mul@var{m}@var{n}3} except that it also adds operand 3.
4098
4099These instructions are not allowed to @code{FAIL}.
4100
4101@cindex @code{umadd@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern
4102@item @samp{umadd@var{m}@var{n}4}
4103Like @code{madd@var{m}@var{n}4}, but zero-extend the multiplication
4104operands instead of sign-extending them.
4105
4106@cindex @code{ssmadd@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern
4107@item @samp{ssmadd@var{m}@var{n}4}
4108Like @code{madd@var{m}@var{n}4}, but all involved operations must be
4109signed-saturating.
4110
4111@cindex @code{usmadd@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern
4112@item @samp{usmadd@var{m}@var{n}4}
4113Like @code{umadd@var{m}@var{n}4}, but all involved operations must be
4114unsigned-saturating.
4115
4116@cindex @code{msub@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern
4117@item @samp{msub@var{m}@var{n}4}
4118Multiply operands 1 and 2, sign-extend them to mode @var{n}, subtract the
4119result from operand 3, and store the result in operand 0.  Operands 1 and 2
4120have mode @var{m} and operands 0 and 3 have mode @var{n}.
4121Both modes must be integer or fixed-point modes and @var{n} must be twice
4122the size of @var{m}.
4123
4124In other words, @code{msub@var{m}@var{n}4} is like
4125@code{mul@var{m}@var{n}3} except that it also subtracts the result
4126from operand 3.
4127
4128These instructions are not allowed to @code{FAIL}.
4129
4130@cindex @code{umsub@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern
4131@item @samp{umsub@var{m}@var{n}4}
4132Like @code{msub@var{m}@var{n}4}, but zero-extend the multiplication
4133operands instead of sign-extending them.
4134
4135@cindex @code{ssmsub@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern
4136@item @samp{ssmsub@var{m}@var{n}4}
4137Like @code{msub@var{m}@var{n}4}, but all involved operations must be
4138signed-saturating.
4139
4140@cindex @code{usmsub@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern
4141@item @samp{usmsub@var{m}@var{n}4}
4142Like @code{umsub@var{m}@var{n}4}, but all involved operations must be
4143unsigned-saturating.
4144
4145@cindex @code{divmod@var{m}4} instruction pattern
4146@item @samp{divmod@var{m}4}
4147Signed division that produces both a quotient and a remainder.
4148Operand 1 is divided by operand 2 to produce a quotient stored
4149in operand 0 and a remainder stored in operand 3.
4150
4151For machines with an instruction that produces both a quotient and a
4152remainder, provide a pattern for @samp{divmod@var{m}4} but do not
4153provide patterns for @samp{div@var{m}3} and @samp{mod@var{m}3}.  This
4154allows optimization in the relatively common case when both the quotient
4155and remainder are computed.
4156
4157If an instruction that just produces a quotient or just a remainder
4158exists and is more efficient than the instruction that produces both,
4159write the output routine of @samp{divmod@var{m}4} to call
4160@code{find_reg_note} and look for a @code{REG_UNUSED} note on the
4161quotient or remainder and generate the appropriate instruction.
4162
4163@cindex @code{udivmod@var{m}4} instruction pattern
4164@item @samp{udivmod@var{m}4}
4165Similar, but does unsigned division.
4166
4167@anchor{shift patterns}
4168@cindex @code{ashl@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4169@cindex @code{ssashl@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4170@cindex @code{usashl@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4171@item @samp{ashl@var{m}3}, @samp{ssashl@var{m}3}, @samp{usashl@var{m}3}
4172Arithmetic-shift operand 1 left by a number of bits specified by operand
41732, and store the result in operand 0.  Here @var{m} is the mode of
4174operand 0 and operand 1; operand 2's mode is specified by the
4175instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert the operand to that
4176mode before generating the instruction.  The meaning of out-of-range shift
4177counts can optionally be specified by @code{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}.
4178@xref{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}.  Operand 2 is always a scalar type.
4179
4180@cindex @code{ashr@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4181@cindex @code{lshr@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4182@cindex @code{rotl@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4183@cindex @code{rotr@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4184@item @samp{ashr@var{m}3}, @samp{lshr@var{m}3}, @samp{rotl@var{m}3}, @samp{rotr@var{m}3}
4185Other shift and rotate instructions, analogous to the
4186@code{ashl@var{m}3} instructions.  Operand 2 is always a scalar type.
4187
4188@cindex @code{vashl@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4189@cindex @code{vashr@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4190@cindex @code{vlshr@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4191@cindex @code{vrotl@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4192@cindex @code{vrotr@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4193@item @samp{vashl@var{m}3}, @samp{vashr@var{m}3}, @samp{vlshr@var{m}3}, @samp{vrotl@var{m}3}, @samp{vrotr@var{m}3}
4194Vector shift and rotate instructions that take vectors as operand 2
4195instead of a scalar type.
4196
4197@cindex @code{neg@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4198@cindex @code{ssneg@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4199@cindex @code{usneg@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4200@item @samp{neg@var{m}2}, @samp{ssneg@var{m}2}, @samp{usneg@var{m}2}
4201Negate operand 1 and store the result in operand 0.
4202
4203@cindex @code{abs@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4204@item @samp{abs@var{m}2}
4205Store the absolute value of operand 1 into operand 0.
4206
4207@cindex @code{sqrt@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4208@item @samp{sqrt@var{m}2}
4209Store the square root of operand 1 into operand 0.
4210
4211The @code{sqrt} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4212corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{sqrtf}
4213built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4214type @code{float}.
4215
4216@cindex @code{fmod@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4217@item @samp{fmod@var{m}3}
4218Store the remainder of dividing operand 1 by operand 2 into
4219operand 0, rounded towards zero to an integer.
4220
4221The @code{fmod} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4222corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{fmodf}
4223built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4224type @code{float}.
4225
4226@cindex @code{remainder@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4227@item @samp{remainder@var{m}3}
4228Store the remainder of dividing operand 1 by operand 2 into
4229operand 0, rounded to the nearest integer.
4230
4231The @code{remainder} built-in function of C always uses the mode
4232which corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the
4233@code{remainderf} built-in function uses the mode which corresponds
4234to the C data type @code{float}.
4235
4236@cindex @code{cos@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4237@item @samp{cos@var{m}2}
4238Store the cosine of operand 1 into operand 0.
4239
4240The @code{cos} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4241corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{cosf}
4242built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4243type @code{float}.
4244
4245@cindex @code{sin@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4246@item @samp{sin@var{m}2}
4247Store the sine of operand 1 into operand 0.
4248
4249The @code{sin} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4250corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{sinf}
4251built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4252type @code{float}.
4253
4254@cindex @code{exp@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4255@item @samp{exp@var{m}2}
4256Store the exponential of operand 1 into operand 0.
4257
4258The @code{exp} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4259corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{expf}
4260built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4261type @code{float}.
4262
4263@cindex @code{log@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4264@item @samp{log@var{m}2}
4265Store the natural logarithm of operand 1 into operand 0.
4266
4267The @code{log} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4268corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{logf}
4269built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4270type @code{float}.
4271
4272@cindex @code{pow@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4273@item @samp{pow@var{m}3}
4274Store the value of operand 1 raised to the exponent operand 2
4275into operand 0.
4276
4277The @code{pow} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4278corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{powf}
4279built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4280type @code{float}.
4281
4282@cindex @code{atan2@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4283@item @samp{atan2@var{m}3}
4284Store the arc tangent (inverse tangent) of operand 1 divided by
4285operand 2 into operand 0, using the signs of both arguments to
4286determine the quadrant of the result.
4287
4288The @code{atan2} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4289corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{atan2f}
4290built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4291type @code{float}.
4292
4293@cindex @code{floor@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4294@item @samp{floor@var{m}2}
4295Store the largest integral value not greater than argument.
4296
4297The @code{floor} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4298corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{floorf}
4299built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4300type @code{float}.
4301
4302@cindex @code{btrunc@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4303@item @samp{btrunc@var{m}2}
4304Store the argument rounded to integer towards zero.
4305
4306The @code{trunc} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4307corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{truncf}
4308built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4309type @code{float}.
4310
4311@cindex @code{round@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4312@item @samp{round@var{m}2}
4313Store the argument rounded to integer away from zero.
4314
4315The @code{round} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4316corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{roundf}
4317built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4318type @code{float}.
4319
4320@cindex @code{ceil@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4321@item @samp{ceil@var{m}2}
4322Store the argument rounded to integer away from zero.
4323
4324The @code{ceil} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4325corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{ceilf}
4326built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4327type @code{float}.
4328
4329@cindex @code{nearbyint@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4330@item @samp{nearbyint@var{m}2}
4331Store the argument rounded according to the default rounding mode
4332
4333The @code{nearbyint} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4334corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{nearbyintf}
4335built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4336type @code{float}.
4337
4338@cindex @code{rint@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4339@item @samp{rint@var{m}2}
4340Store the argument rounded according to the default rounding mode and
4341raise the inexact exception when the result differs in value from
4342the argument
4343
4344The @code{rint} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4345corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{rintf}
4346built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4347type @code{float}.
4348
4349@cindex @code{lrint@var{m}@var{n}2}
4350@item @samp{lrint@var{m}@var{n}2}
4351Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed
4352point mode @var{n} as a signed number according to the current
4353rounding mode and store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).
4354
4355@cindex @code{lround@var{m}@var{n}2}
4356@item @samp{lround@var{m}2}
4357Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed
4358point mode @var{n} as a signed number rounding to nearest and away
4359from zero and store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).
4360
4361@cindex @code{lfloor@var{m}@var{n}2}
4362@item @samp{lfloor@var{m}2}
4363Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed
4364point mode @var{n} as a signed number rounding down and store in
4365operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).
4366
4367@cindex @code{lceil@var{m}@var{n}2}
4368@item @samp{lceil@var{m}2}
4369Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed
4370point mode @var{n} as a signed number rounding up and store in
4371operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).
4372
4373@cindex @code{copysign@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4374@item @samp{copysign@var{m}3}
4375Store a value with the magnitude of operand 1 and the sign of operand
43762 into operand 0.
4377
4378The @code{copysign} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4379corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{copysignf}
4380built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4381type @code{float}.
4382
4383@cindex @code{ffs@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4384@item @samp{ffs@var{m}2}
4385Store into operand 0 one plus the index of the least significant 1-bit
4386of operand 1.  If operand 1 is zero, store zero.  @var{m} is the mode
4387of operand 0; operand 1's mode is specified by the instruction
4388pattern, and the compiler will convert the operand to that mode before
4389generating the instruction.
4390
4391The @code{ffs} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4392corresponds to the C data type @code{int}.
4393
4394@cindex @code{clz@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4395@item @samp{clz@var{m}2}
4396Store into operand 0 the number of leading 0-bits in @var{x}, starting
4397at the most significant bit position.  If @var{x} is 0, the
4398@code{CLZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO} (@pxref{Misc}) macro defines if
4399the result is undefined or has a useful value.
4400@var{m} is the mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode is
4401specified by the instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert the
4402operand to that mode before generating the instruction.
4403
4404@cindex @code{ctz@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4405@item @samp{ctz@var{m}2}
4406Store into operand 0 the number of trailing 0-bits in @var{x}, starting
4407at the least significant bit position.  If @var{x} is 0, the
4408@code{CTZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO} (@pxref{Misc}) macro defines if
4409the result is undefined or has a useful value.
4410@var{m} is the mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode is
4411specified by the instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert the
4412operand to that mode before generating the instruction.
4413
4414@cindex @code{popcount@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4415@item @samp{popcount@var{m}2}
4416Store into operand 0 the number of 1-bits in @var{x}.  @var{m} is the
4417mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode is specified by the instruction
4418pattern, and the compiler will convert the operand to that mode before
4419generating the instruction.
4420
4421@cindex @code{parity@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4422@item @samp{parity@var{m}2}
4423Store into operand 0 the parity of @var{x}, i.e.@: the number of 1-bits
4424in @var{x} modulo 2.  @var{m} is the mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode
4425is specified by the instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert
4426the operand to that mode before generating the instruction.
4427
4428@cindex @code{one_cmpl@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4429@item @samp{one_cmpl@var{m}2}
4430Store the bitwise-complement of operand 1 into operand 0.
4431
4432@cindex @code{movmem@var{m}} instruction pattern
4433@item @samp{movmem@var{m}}
4434Block move instruction.  The destination and source blocks of memory
4435are the first two operands, and both are @code{mem:BLK}s with an
4436address in mode @code{Pmode}.
4437
4438The number of bytes to move is the third operand, in mode @var{m}.
4439Usually, you specify @code{word_mode} for @var{m}.  However, if you can
4440generate better code knowing the range of valid lengths is smaller than
4441those representable in a full word, you should provide a pattern with a
4442mode corresponding to the range of values you can handle efficiently
4443(e.g., @code{QImode} for values in the range 0--127; note we avoid numbers
4444that appear negative) and also a pattern with @code{word_mode}.
4445
4446The fourth operand is the known shared alignment of the source and
4447destination, in the form of a @code{const_int} rtx.  Thus, if the
4448compiler knows that both source and destination are word-aligned,
4449it may provide the value 4 for this operand.
4450
4451Optional operands 5 and 6 specify expected alignment and size of block
4452respectively.  The expected alignment differs from alignment in operand 4
4453in a way that the blocks are not required to be aligned according to it in
4454all cases. This expected alignment is also in bytes, just like operand 4.
4455Expected size, when unknown, is set to @code{(const_int -1)}.
4456
4457Descriptions of multiple @code{movmem@var{m}} patterns can only be
4458beneficial if the patterns for smaller modes have fewer restrictions
4459on their first, second and fourth operands.  Note that the mode @var{m}
4460in @code{movmem@var{m}} does not impose any restriction on the mode of
4461individually moved data units in the block.
4462
4463These patterns need not give special consideration to the possibility
4464that the source and destination strings might overlap.
4465
4466@cindex @code{movstr} instruction pattern
4467@item @samp{movstr}
4468String copy instruction, with @code{stpcpy} semantics.  Operand 0 is
4469an output operand in mode @code{Pmode}.  The addresses of the
4470destination and source strings are operands 1 and 2, and both are
4471@code{mem:BLK}s with addresses in mode @code{Pmode}.  The execution of
4472the expansion of this pattern should store in operand 0 the address in
4473which the @code{NUL} terminator was stored in the destination string.
4474
4475@cindex @code{setmem@var{m}} instruction pattern
4476@item @samp{setmem@var{m}}
4477Block set instruction.  The destination string is the first operand,
4478given as a @code{mem:BLK} whose address is in mode @code{Pmode}.  The
4479number of bytes to set is the second operand, in mode @var{m}.  The value to
4480initialize the memory with is the third operand. Targets that only support the
4481clearing of memory should reject any value that is not the constant 0.  See
4482@samp{movmem@var{m}} for a discussion of the choice of mode.
4483
4484The fourth operand is the known alignment of the destination, in the form
4485of a @code{const_int} rtx.  Thus, if the compiler knows that the
4486destination is word-aligned, it may provide the value 4 for this
4487operand.
4488
4489Optional operands 5 and 6 specify expected alignment and size of block
4490respectively.  The expected alignment differs from alignment in operand 4
4491in a way that the blocks are not required to be aligned according to it in
4492all cases. This expected alignment is also in bytes, just like operand 4.
4493Expected size, when unknown, is set to @code{(const_int -1)}.
4494
4495The use for multiple @code{setmem@var{m}} is as for @code{movmem@var{m}}.
4496
4497@cindex @code{cmpstrn@var{m}} instruction pattern
4498@item @samp{cmpstrn@var{m}}
4499String compare instruction, with five operands.  Operand 0 is the output;
4500it has mode @var{m}.  The remaining four operands are like the operands
4501of @samp{movmem@var{m}}.  The two memory blocks specified are compared
4502byte by byte in lexicographic order starting at the beginning of each
4503string.  The instruction is not allowed to prefetch more than one byte
4504at a time since either string may end in the first byte and reading past
4505that may access an invalid page or segment and cause a fault.  The
4506comparison terminates early if the fetched bytes are different or if
4507they are equal to zero.  The effect of the instruction is to store a
4508value in operand 0 whose sign indicates the result of the comparison.
4509
4510@cindex @code{cmpstr@var{m}} instruction pattern
4511@item @samp{cmpstr@var{m}}
4512String compare instruction, without known maximum length.  Operand 0 is the
4513output; it has mode @var{m}.  The second and third operand are the blocks of
4514memory to be compared; both are @code{mem:BLK} with an address in mode
4515@code{Pmode}.
4516
4517The fourth operand is the known shared alignment of the source and
4518destination, in the form of a @code{const_int} rtx.  Thus, if the
4519compiler knows that both source and destination are word-aligned,
4520it may provide the value 4 for this operand.
4521
4522The two memory blocks specified are compared byte by byte in lexicographic
4523order starting at the beginning of each string.  The instruction is not allowed
4524to prefetch more than one byte at a time since either string may end in the
4525first byte and reading past that may access an invalid page or segment and
4526cause a fault.  The comparison will terminate when the fetched bytes
4527are different or if they are equal to zero.  The effect of the
4528instruction is to store a value in operand 0 whose sign indicates the
4529result of the comparison.
4530
4531@cindex @code{cmpmem@var{m}} instruction pattern
4532@item @samp{cmpmem@var{m}}
4533Block compare instruction, with five operands like the operands
4534of @samp{cmpstr@var{m}}.  The two memory blocks specified are compared
4535byte by byte in lexicographic order starting at the beginning of each
4536block.  Unlike @samp{cmpstr@var{m}} the instruction can prefetch
4537any bytes in the two memory blocks.  Also unlike @samp{cmpstr@var{m}}
4538the comparison will not stop if both bytes are zero.  The effect of
4539the instruction is to store a value in operand 0 whose sign indicates
4540the result of the comparison.
4541
4542@cindex @code{strlen@var{m}} instruction pattern
4543@item @samp{strlen@var{m}}
4544Compute the length of a string, with three operands.
4545Operand 0 is the result (of mode @var{m}), operand 1 is
4546a @code{mem} referring to the first character of the string,
4547operand 2 is the character to search for (normally zero),
4548and operand 3 is a constant describing the known alignment
4549of the beginning of the string.
4550
4551@cindex @code{float@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4552@item @samp{float@var{m}@var{n}2}
4553Convert signed integer operand 1 (valid for fixed point mode @var{m}) to
4554floating point mode @var{n} and store in operand 0 (which has mode
4555@var{n}).
4556
4557@cindex @code{floatuns@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4558@item @samp{floatuns@var{m}@var{n}2}
4559Convert unsigned integer operand 1 (valid for fixed point mode @var{m})
4560to floating point mode @var{n} and store in operand 0 (which has mode
4561@var{n}).
4562
4563@cindex @code{fix@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4564@item @samp{fix@var{m}@var{n}2}
4565Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed
4566point mode @var{n} as a signed number and store in operand 0 (which
4567has mode @var{n}).  This instruction's result is defined only when
4568the value of operand 1 is an integer.
4569
4570If the machine description defines this pattern, it also needs to
4571define the @code{ftrunc} pattern.
4572
4573@cindex @code{fixuns@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4574@item @samp{fixuns@var{m}@var{n}2}
4575Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed
4576point mode @var{n} as an unsigned number and store in operand 0 (which
4577has mode @var{n}).  This instruction's result is defined only when the
4578value of operand 1 is an integer.
4579
4580@cindex @code{ftrunc@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4581@item @samp{ftrunc@var{m}2}
4582Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to an
4583integer value, still represented in floating point mode @var{m}, and
4584store it in operand 0 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}).
4585
4586@cindex @code{fix_trunc@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4587@item @samp{fix_trunc@var{m}@var{n}2}
4588Like @samp{fix@var{m}@var{n}2} but works for any floating point value
4589of mode @var{m} by converting the value to an integer.
4590
4591@cindex @code{fixuns_trunc@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4592@item @samp{fixuns_trunc@var{m}@var{n}2}
4593Like @samp{fixuns@var{m}@var{n}2} but works for any floating point
4594value of mode @var{m} by converting the value to an integer.
4595
4596@cindex @code{trunc@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4597@item @samp{trunc@var{m}@var{n}2}
4598Truncate operand 1 (valid for mode @var{m}) to mode @var{n} and
4599store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).  Both modes must be fixed
4600point or both floating point.
4601
4602@cindex @code{extend@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4603@item @samp{extend@var{m}@var{n}2}
4604Sign-extend operand 1 (valid for mode @var{m}) to mode @var{n} and
4605store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).  Both modes must be fixed
4606point or both floating point.
4607
4608@cindex @code{zero_extend@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4609@item @samp{zero_extend@var{m}@var{n}2}
4610Zero-extend operand 1 (valid for mode @var{m}) to mode @var{n} and
4611store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).  Both modes must be fixed
4612point.
4613
4614@cindex @code{fract@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4615@item @samp{fract@var{m}@var{n}2}
4616Convert operand 1 of mode @var{m} to mode @var{n} and store in
4617operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).  Mode @var{m} and mode @var{n}
4618could be fixed-point to fixed-point, signed integer to fixed-point,
4619fixed-point to signed integer, floating-point to fixed-point,
4620or fixed-point to floating-point.
4621When overflows or underflows happen, the results are undefined.
4622
4623@cindex @code{satfract@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4624@item @samp{satfract@var{m}@var{n}2}
4625Convert operand 1 of mode @var{m} to mode @var{n} and store in
4626operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).  Mode @var{m} and mode @var{n}
4627could be fixed-point to fixed-point, signed integer to fixed-point,
4628or floating-point to fixed-point.
4629When overflows or underflows happen, the instruction saturates the
4630results to the maximum or the minimum.
4631
4632@cindex @code{fractuns@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4633@item @samp{fractuns@var{m}@var{n}2}
4634Convert operand 1 of mode @var{m} to mode @var{n} and store in
4635operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).  Mode @var{m} and mode @var{n}
4636could be unsigned integer to fixed-point, or
4637fixed-point to unsigned integer.
4638When overflows or underflows happen, the results are undefined.
4639
4640@cindex @code{satfractuns@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4641@item @samp{satfractuns@var{m}@var{n}2}
4642Convert unsigned integer operand 1 of mode @var{m} to fixed-point mode
4643@var{n} and store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).
4644When overflows or underflows happen, the instruction saturates the
4645results to the maximum or the minimum.
4646
4647@cindex @code{extv} instruction pattern
4648@item @samp{extv}
4649Extract a bit-field from operand 1 (a register or memory operand), where
4650operand 2 specifies the width in bits and operand 3 the starting bit,
4651and store it in operand 0.  Operand 0 must have mode @code{word_mode}.
4652Operand 1 may have mode @code{byte_mode} or @code{word_mode}; often
4653@code{word_mode} is allowed only for registers.  Operands 2 and 3 must
4654be valid for @code{word_mode}.
4655
4656The RTL generation pass generates this instruction only with constants
4657for operands 2 and 3 and the constant is never zero for operand 2.
4658
4659The bit-field value is sign-extended to a full word integer
4660before it is stored in operand 0.
4661
4662@cindex @code{extzv} instruction pattern
4663@item @samp{extzv}
4664Like @samp{extv} except that the bit-field value is zero-extended.
4665
4666@cindex @code{insv} instruction pattern
4667@item @samp{insv}
4668Store operand 3 (which must be valid for @code{word_mode}) into a
4669bit-field in operand 0, where operand 1 specifies the width in bits and
4670operand 2 the starting bit.  Operand 0 may have mode @code{byte_mode} or
4671@code{word_mode}; often @code{word_mode} is allowed only for registers.
4672Operands 1 and 2 must be valid for @code{word_mode}.
4673
4674The RTL generation pass generates this instruction only with constants
4675for operands 1 and 2 and the constant is never zero for operand 1.
4676
4677@cindex @code{mov@var{mode}cc} instruction pattern
4678@item @samp{mov@var{mode}cc}
4679Conditionally move operand 2 or operand 3 into operand 0 according to the
4680comparison in operand 1.  If the comparison is true, operand 2 is moved
4681into operand 0, otherwise operand 3 is moved.
4682
4683The mode of the operands being compared need not be the same as the operands
4684being moved.  Some machines, sparc64 for example, have instructions that
4685conditionally move an integer value based on the floating point condition
4686codes and vice versa.
4687
4688If the machine does not have conditional move instructions, do not
4689define these patterns.
4690
4691@cindex @code{add@var{mode}cc} instruction pattern
4692@item @samp{add@var{mode}cc}
4693Similar to @samp{mov@var{mode}cc} but for conditional addition.  Conditionally
4694move operand 2 or (operands 2 + operand 3) into operand 0 according to the
4695comparison in operand 1.  If the comparison is true, operand 2 is moved into
4696operand 0, otherwise (operand 2 + operand 3) is moved.
4697
4698@cindex @code{cstore@var{mode}4} instruction pattern
4699@item @samp{cstore@var{mode}4}
4700Store zero or nonzero in operand 0 according to whether a comparison
4701is true.  Operand 1 is a comparison operator.  Operand 2 and operand 3
4702are the first and second operand of the comparison, respectively.
4703You specify the mode that operand 0 must have when you write the
4704@code{match_operand} expression.  The compiler automatically sees which
4705mode you have used and supplies an operand of that mode.
4706
4707The value stored for a true condition must have 1 as its low bit, or
4708else must be negative.  Otherwise the instruction is not suitable and
4709you should omit it from the machine description.  You describe to the
4710compiler exactly which value is stored by defining the macro
4711@code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} (@pxref{Misc}).  If a description cannot be
4712found that can be used for all the @samp{s@var{cond}} patterns, you
4713should omit those operations from the machine description.
4714
4715These operations may fail, but should do so only in relatively
4716uncommon cases; if they would fail for common cases involving
4717integer comparisons, it is best to omit these patterns.
4718
4719If these operations are omitted, the compiler will usually generate code
4720that copies the constant one to the target and branches around an
4721assignment of zero to the target.  If this code is more efficient than
4722the potential instructions used for the @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} pattern
4723followed by those required to convert the result into a 1 or a zero in
4724@code{SImode}, you should omit the @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} operations from
4725the machine description.
4726
4727@cindex @code{cbranch@var{mode}4} instruction pattern
4728@item @samp{cbranch@var{mode}4}
4729Conditional branch instruction combined with a compare instruction.
4730Operand 0 is a comparison operator.  Operand 1 and operand 2 are the
4731first and second operands of the comparison, respectively.  Operand 3
4732is a @code{label_ref} that refers to the label to jump to.
4733
4734@cindex @code{jump} instruction pattern
4735@item @samp{jump}
4736A jump inside a function; an unconditional branch.  Operand 0 is the
4737@code{label_ref} of the label to jump to.  This pattern name is mandatory
4738on all machines.
4739
4740@cindex @code{call} instruction pattern
4741@item @samp{call}
4742Subroutine call instruction returning no value.  Operand 0 is the
4743function to call; operand 1 is the number of bytes of arguments pushed
4744as a @code{const_int}; operand 2 is the number of registers used as
4745operands.
4746
4747On most machines, operand 2 is not actually stored into the RTL
4748pattern.  It is supplied for the sake of some RISC machines which need
4749to put this information into the assembler code; they can put it in
4750the RTL instead of operand 1.
4751
4752Operand 0 should be a @code{mem} RTX whose address is the address of the
4753function.  Note, however, that this address can be a @code{symbol_ref}
4754expression even if it would not be a legitimate memory address on the
4755target machine.  If it is also not a valid argument for a call
4756instruction, the pattern for this operation should be a
4757@code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions}) that places the
4758address into a register and uses that register in the call instruction.
4759
4760@cindex @code{call_value} instruction pattern
4761@item @samp{call_value}
4762Subroutine call instruction returning a value.  Operand 0 is the hard
4763register in which the value is returned.  There are three more
4764operands, the same as the three operands of the @samp{call}
4765instruction (but with numbers increased by one).
4766
4767Subroutines that return @code{BLKmode} objects use the @samp{call}
4768insn.
4769
4770@cindex @code{call_pop} instruction pattern
4771@cindex @code{call_value_pop} instruction pattern
4772@item @samp{call_pop}, @samp{call_value_pop}
4773Similar to @samp{call} and @samp{call_value}, except used if defined and
4774if @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} is nonzero.  They should emit a @code{parallel}
4775that contains both the function call and a @code{set} to indicate the
4776adjustment made to the frame pointer.
4777
4778For machines where @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} can be nonzero, the use of these
4779patterns increases the number of functions for which the frame pointer
4780can be eliminated, if desired.
4781
4782@cindex @code{untyped_call} instruction pattern
4783@item @samp{untyped_call}
4784Subroutine call instruction returning a value of any type.  Operand 0 is
4785the function to call; operand 1 is a memory location where the result of
4786calling the function is to be stored; operand 2 is a @code{parallel}
4787expression where each element is a @code{set} expression that indicates
4788the saving of a function return value into the result block.
4789
4790This instruction pattern should be defined to support
4791@code{__builtin_apply} on machines where special instructions are needed
4792to call a subroutine with arbitrary arguments or to save the value
4793returned.  This instruction pattern is required on machines that have
4794multiple registers that can hold a return value
4795(i.e.@: @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} is true for more than one register).
4796
4797@cindex @code{return} instruction pattern
4798@item @samp{return}
4799Subroutine return instruction.  This instruction pattern name should be
4800defined only if a single instruction can do all the work of returning
4801from a function.
4802
4803Like the @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, this pattern is also used after the
4804RTL generation phase.  In this case it is to support machines where
4805multiple instructions are usually needed to return from a function, but
4806some class of functions only requires one instruction to implement a
4807return.  Normally, the applicable functions are those which do not need
4808to save any registers or allocate stack space.
4809
4810@findex reload_completed
4811@findex leaf_function_p
4812For such machines, the condition specified in this pattern should only
4813be true when @code{reload_completed} is nonzero and the function's
4814epilogue would only be a single instruction.  For machines with register
4815windows, the routine @code{leaf_function_p} may be used to determine if
4816a register window push is required.
4817
4818Machines that have conditional return instructions should define patterns
4819such as
4820
4821@smallexample
4822(define_insn ""
4823  [(set (pc)
4824        (if_then_else (match_operator
4825                         0 "comparison_operator"
4826                         [(cc0) (const_int 0)])
4827                      (return)
4828                      (pc)))]
4829  "@var{condition}"
4830  "@dots{}")
4831@end smallexample
4832
4833where @var{condition} would normally be the same condition specified on the
4834named @samp{return} pattern.
4835
4836@cindex @code{untyped_return} instruction pattern
4837@item @samp{untyped_return}
4838Untyped subroutine return instruction.  This instruction pattern should
4839be defined to support @code{__builtin_return} on machines where special
4840instructions are needed to return a value of any type.
4841
4842Operand 0 is a memory location where the result of calling a function
4843with @code{__builtin_apply} is stored; operand 1 is a @code{parallel}
4844expression where each element is a @code{set} expression that indicates
4845the restoring of a function return value from the result block.
4846
4847@cindex @code{nop} instruction pattern
4848@item @samp{nop}
4849No-op instruction.  This instruction pattern name should always be defined
4850to output a no-op in assembler code.  @code{(const_int 0)} will do as an
4851RTL pattern.
4852
4853@cindex @code{indirect_jump} instruction pattern
4854@item @samp{indirect_jump}
4855An instruction to jump to an address which is operand zero.
4856This pattern name is mandatory on all machines.
4857
4858@cindex @code{casesi} instruction pattern
4859@item @samp{casesi}
4860Instruction to jump through a dispatch table, including bounds checking.
4861This instruction takes five operands:
4862
4863@enumerate
4864@item
4865The index to dispatch on, which has mode @code{SImode}.
4866
4867@item
4868The lower bound for indices in the table, an integer constant.
4869
4870@item
4871The total range of indices in the table---the largest index
4872minus the smallest one (both inclusive).
4873
4874@item
4875A label that precedes the table itself.
4876
4877@item
4878A label to jump to if the index has a value outside the bounds.
4879@end enumerate
4880
4881The table is an @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec} inside of a
4882@code{jump_insn}.  The number of elements in the table is one plus the
4883difference between the upper bound and the lower bound.
4884
4885@cindex @code{tablejump} instruction pattern
4886@item @samp{tablejump}
4887Instruction to jump to a variable address.  This is a low-level
4888capability which can be used to implement a dispatch table when there
4889is no @samp{casesi} pattern.
4890
4891This pattern requires two operands: the address or offset, and a label
4892which should immediately precede the jump table.  If the macro
4893@code{CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE} evaluates to a nonzero value then the first
4894operand is an offset which counts from the address of the table; otherwise,
4895it is an absolute address to jump to.  In either case, the first operand has
4896mode @code{Pmode}.
4897
4898The @samp{tablejump} insn is always the last insn before the jump
4899table it uses.  Its assembler code normally has no need to use the
4900second operand, but you should incorporate it in the RTL pattern so
4901that the jump optimizer will not delete the table as unreachable code.
4902
4903
4904@cindex @code{decrement_and_branch_until_zero} instruction pattern
4905@item @samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero}
4906Conditional branch instruction that decrements a register and
4907jumps if the register is nonzero.  Operand 0 is the register to
4908decrement and test; operand 1 is the label to jump to if the
4909register is nonzero.  @xref{Looping Patterns}.
4910
4911This optional instruction pattern is only used by the combiner,
4912typically for loops reversed by the loop optimizer when strength
4913reduction is enabled.
4914
4915@cindex @code{doloop_end} instruction pattern
4916@item @samp{doloop_end}
4917Conditional branch instruction that decrements a register and jumps if
4918the register is nonzero.  This instruction takes five operands: Operand
49190 is the register to decrement and test; operand 1 is the number of loop
4920iterations as a @code{const_int} or @code{const0_rtx} if this cannot be
4921determined until run-time; operand 2 is the actual or estimated maximum
4922number of iterations as a @code{const_int}; operand 3 is the number of
4923enclosed loops as a @code{const_int} (an innermost loop has a value of
49241); operand 4 is the label to jump to if the register is nonzero.
4925@xref{Looping Patterns}.
4926
4927This optional instruction pattern should be defined for machines with
4928low-overhead looping instructions as the loop optimizer will try to
4929modify suitable loops to utilize it.  If nested low-overhead looping is
4930not supported, use a @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions})
4931and make the pattern fail if operand 3 is not @code{const1_rtx}.
4932Similarly, if the actual or estimated maximum number of iterations is
4933too large for this instruction, make it fail.
4934
4935@cindex @code{doloop_begin} instruction pattern
4936@item @samp{doloop_begin}
4937Companion instruction to @code{doloop_end} required for machines that
4938need to perform some initialization, such as loading special registers
4939used by a low-overhead looping instruction.  If initialization insns do
4940not always need to be emitted, use a @code{define_expand}
4941(@pxref{Expander Definitions}) and make it fail.
4942
4943
4944@cindex @code{canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare} instruction pattern
4945@item @samp{canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare}
4946Canonicalize the function pointer in operand 1 and store the result
4947into operand 0.
4948
4949Operand 0 is always a @code{reg} and has mode @code{Pmode}; operand 1
4950may be a @code{reg}, @code{mem}, @code{symbol_ref}, @code{const_int}, etc
4951and also has mode @code{Pmode}.
4952
4953Canonicalization of a function pointer usually involves computing
4954the address of the function which would be called if the function
4955pointer were used in an indirect call.
4956
4957Only define this pattern if function pointers on the target machine
4958can have different values but still call the same function when
4959used in an indirect call.
4960
4961@cindex @code{save_stack_block} instruction pattern
4962@cindex @code{save_stack_function} instruction pattern
4963@cindex @code{save_stack_nonlocal} instruction pattern
4964@cindex @code{restore_stack_block} instruction pattern
4965@cindex @code{restore_stack_function} instruction pattern
4966@cindex @code{restore_stack_nonlocal} instruction pattern
4967@item @samp{save_stack_block}
4968@itemx @samp{save_stack_function}
4969@itemx @samp{save_stack_nonlocal}
4970@itemx @samp{restore_stack_block}
4971@itemx @samp{restore_stack_function}
4972@itemx @samp{restore_stack_nonlocal}
4973Most machines save and restore the stack pointer by copying it to or
4974from an object of mode @code{Pmode}.  Do not define these patterns on
4975such machines.
4976
4977Some machines require special handling for stack pointer saves and
4978restores.  On those machines, define the patterns corresponding to the
4979non-standard cases by using a @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander
4980Definitions}) that produces the required insns.  The three types of
4981saves and restores are:
4982
4983@enumerate
4984@item
4985@samp{save_stack_block} saves the stack pointer at the start of a block
4986that allocates a variable-sized object, and @samp{restore_stack_block}
4987restores the stack pointer when the block is exited.
4988
4989@item
4990@samp{save_stack_function} and @samp{restore_stack_function} do a
4991similar job for the outermost block of a function and are used when the
4992function allocates variable-sized objects or calls @code{alloca}.  Only
4993the epilogue uses the restored stack pointer, allowing a simpler save or
4994restore sequence on some machines.
4995
4996@item
4997@samp{save_stack_nonlocal} is used in functions that contain labels
4998branched to by nested functions.  It saves the stack pointer in such a
4999way that the inner function can use @samp{restore_stack_nonlocal} to
5000restore the stack pointer.  The compiler generates code to restore the
5001frame and argument pointer registers, but some machines require saving
5002and restoring additional data such as register window information or
5003stack backchains.  Place insns in these patterns to save and restore any
5004such required data.
5005@end enumerate
5006
5007When saving the stack pointer, operand 0 is the save area and operand 1
5008is the stack pointer.  The mode used to allocate the save area defaults
5009to @code{Pmode} but you can override that choice by defining the
5010@code{STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE} macro (@pxref{Storage Layout}).  You must
5011specify an integral mode, or @code{VOIDmode} if no save area is needed
5012for a particular type of save (either because no save is needed or
5013because a machine-specific save area can be used).  Operand 0 is the
5014stack pointer and operand 1 is the save area for restore operations.  If
5015@samp{save_stack_block} is defined, operand 0 must not be
5016@code{VOIDmode} since these saves can be arbitrarily nested.
5017
5018A save area is a @code{mem} that is at a constant offset from
5019@code{virtual_stack_vars_rtx} when the stack pointer is saved for use by
5020nonlocal gotos and a @code{reg} in the other two cases.
5021
5022@cindex @code{allocate_stack} instruction pattern
5023@item @samp{allocate_stack}
5024Subtract (or add if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is undefined) operand 1 from
5025the stack pointer to create space for dynamically allocated data.
5026
5027Store the resultant pointer to this space into operand 0.  If you
5028are allocating space from the main stack, do this by emitting a
5029move insn to copy @code{virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx} to operand 0.
5030If you are allocating the space elsewhere, generate code to copy the
5031location of the space to operand 0.  In the latter case, you must
5032ensure this space gets freed when the corresponding space on the main
5033stack is free.
5034
5035Do not define this pattern if all that must be done is the subtraction.
5036Some machines require other operations such as stack probes or
5037maintaining the back chain.  Define this pattern to emit those
5038operations in addition to updating the stack pointer.
5039
5040@cindex @code{check_stack} instruction pattern
5041@item @samp{check_stack}
5042If stack checking (@pxref{Stack Checking}) cannot be done on your system by
5043probing the stack, define this pattern to perform the needed check and signal
5044an error if the stack has overflowed.  The single operand is the address in
5045the stack farthest from the current stack pointer that you need to validate.
5046Normally, on platforms where this pattern is needed, you would obtain the
5047stack limit from a global or thread-specific variable or register.
5048
5049@cindex @code{probe_stack} instruction pattern
5050@item @samp{probe_stack}
5051If stack checking (@pxref{Stack Checking}) can be done on your system by
5052probing the stack but doing it with a ``store zero'' instruction is not valid
5053or optimal, define this pattern to do the probing differently and signal an
5054error if the stack has overflowed.  The single operand is the memory reference
5055in the stack that needs to be probed.
5056
5057@cindex @code{nonlocal_goto} instruction pattern
5058@item @samp{nonlocal_goto}
5059Emit code to generate a non-local goto, e.g., a jump from one function
5060to a label in an outer function.  This pattern has four arguments,
5061each representing a value to be used in the jump.  The first
5062argument is to be loaded into the frame pointer, the second is
5063the address to branch to (code to dispatch to the actual label),
5064the third is the address of a location where the stack is saved,
5065and the last is the address of the label, to be placed in the
5066location for the incoming static chain.
5067
5068On most machines you need not define this pattern, since GCC will
5069already generate the correct code, which is to load the frame pointer
5070and static chain, restore the stack (using the
5071@samp{restore_stack_nonlocal} pattern, if defined), and jump indirectly
5072to the dispatcher.  You need only define this pattern if this code will
5073not work on your machine.
5074
5075@cindex @code{nonlocal_goto_receiver} instruction pattern
5076@item @samp{nonlocal_goto_receiver}
5077This pattern, if defined, contains code needed at the target of a
5078nonlocal goto after the code already generated by GCC@.  You will not
5079normally need to define this pattern.  A typical reason why you might
5080need this pattern is if some value, such as a pointer to a global table,
5081must be restored when the frame pointer is restored.  Note that a nonlocal
5082goto only occurs within a unit-of-translation, so a global table pointer
5083that is shared by all functions of a given module need not be restored.
5084There are no arguments.
5085
5086@cindex @code{exception_receiver} instruction pattern
5087@item @samp{exception_receiver}
5088This pattern, if defined, contains code needed at the site of an
5089exception handler that isn't needed at the site of a nonlocal goto.  You
5090will not normally need to define this pattern.  A typical reason why you
5091might need this pattern is if some value, such as a pointer to a global
5092table, must be restored after control flow is branched to the handler of
5093an exception.  There are no arguments.
5094
5095@cindex @code{builtin_setjmp_setup} instruction pattern
5096@item @samp{builtin_setjmp_setup}
5097This pattern, if defined, contains additional code needed to initialize
5098the @code{jmp_buf}.  You will not normally need to define this pattern.
5099A typical reason why you might need this pattern is if some value, such
5100as a pointer to a global table, must be restored.  Though it is
5101preferred that the pointer value be recalculated if possible (given the
5102address of a label for instance).  The single argument is a pointer to
5103the @code{jmp_buf}.  Note that the buffer is five words long and that
5104the first three are normally used by the generic mechanism.
5105
5106@cindex @code{builtin_setjmp_receiver} instruction pattern
5107@item @samp{builtin_setjmp_receiver}
5108This pattern, if defined, contains code needed at the site of a
5109built-in setjmp that isn't needed at the site of a nonlocal goto.  You
5110will not normally need to define this pattern.  A typical reason why you
5111might need this pattern is if some value, such as a pointer to a global
5112table, must be restored.  It takes one argument, which is the label
5113to which builtin_longjmp transfered control; this pattern may be emitted
5114at a small offset from that label.
5115
5116@cindex @code{builtin_longjmp} instruction pattern
5117@item @samp{builtin_longjmp}
5118This pattern, if defined, performs the entire action of the longjmp.
5119You will not normally need to define this pattern unless you also define
5120@code{builtin_setjmp_setup}.  The single argument is a pointer to the
5121@code{jmp_buf}.
5122
5123@cindex @code{eh_return} instruction pattern
5124@item @samp{eh_return}
5125This pattern, if defined, affects the way @code{__builtin_eh_return},
5126and thence the call frame exception handling library routines, are
5127built.  It is intended to handle non-trivial actions needed along
5128the abnormal return path.
5129
5130The address of the exception handler to which the function should return
5131is passed as operand to this pattern.  It will normally need to copied by
5132the pattern to some special register or memory location.
5133If the pattern needs to determine the location of the target call
5134frame in order to do so, it may use @code{EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX},
5135if defined; it will have already been assigned.
5136
5137If this pattern is not defined, the default action will be to simply
5138copy the return address to @code{EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX}.  Either
5139that macro or this pattern needs to be defined if call frame exception
5140handling is to be used.
5141
5142@cindex @code{prologue} instruction pattern
5143@anchor{prologue instruction pattern}
5144@item @samp{prologue}
5145This pattern, if defined, emits RTL for entry to a function.  The function
5146entry is responsible for setting up the stack frame, initializing the frame
5147pointer register, saving callee saved registers, etc.
5148
5149Using a prologue pattern is generally preferred over defining
5150@code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} to emit assembly code for the prologue.
5151
5152The @code{prologue} pattern is particularly useful for targets which perform
5153instruction scheduling.
5154
5155@cindex @code{epilogue} instruction pattern
5156@anchor{epilogue instruction pattern}
5157@item @samp{epilogue}
5158This pattern emits RTL for exit from a function.  The function
5159exit is responsible for deallocating the stack frame, restoring callee saved
5160registers and emitting the return instruction.
5161
5162Using an epilogue pattern is generally preferred over defining
5163@code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to emit assembly code for the epilogue.
5164
5165The @code{epilogue} pattern is particularly useful for targets which perform
5166instruction scheduling or which have delay slots for their return instruction.
5167
5168@cindex @code{sibcall_epilogue} instruction pattern
5169@item @samp{sibcall_epilogue}
5170This pattern, if defined, emits RTL for exit from a function without the final
5171branch back to the calling function.  This pattern will be emitted before any
5172sibling call (aka tail call) sites.
5173
5174The @code{sibcall_epilogue} pattern must not clobber any arguments used for
5175parameter passing or any stack slots for arguments passed to the current
5176function.
5177
5178@cindex @code{trap} instruction pattern
5179@item @samp{trap}
5180This pattern, if defined, signals an error, typically by causing some
5181kind of signal to be raised.  Among other places, it is used by the Java
5182front end to signal `invalid array index' exceptions.
5183
5184@cindex @code{ctrap@var{MM}4} instruction pattern
5185@item @samp{ctrap@var{MM}4}
5186Conditional trap instruction.  Operand 0 is a piece of RTL which
5187performs a comparison, and operands 1 and 2 are the arms of the
5188comparison.  Operand 3 is the trap code, an integer.
5189
5190A typical @code{ctrap} pattern looks like
5191
5192@smallexample
5193(define_insn "ctrapsi4"
5194  [(trap_if (match_operator 0 "trap_operator"
5195             [(match_operand 1 "register_operand")
5196              (match_operand 2 "immediate_operand")])
5197            (match_operand 3 "const_int_operand" "i"))]
5198  ""
5199  "@dots{}")
5200@end smallexample
5201
5202@cindex @code{prefetch} instruction pattern
5203@item @samp{prefetch}
5204
5205This pattern, if defined, emits code for a non-faulting data prefetch
5206instruction.  Operand 0 is the address of the memory to prefetch.  Operand 1
5207is a constant 1 if the prefetch is preparing for a write to the memory
5208address, or a constant 0 otherwise.  Operand 2 is the expected degree of
5209temporal locality of the data and is a value between 0 and 3, inclusive; 0
5210means that the data has no temporal locality, so it need not be left in the
5211cache after the access; 3 means that the data has a high degree of temporal
5212locality and should be left in all levels of cache possible;  1 and 2 mean,
5213respectively, a low or moderate degree of temporal locality.
5214
5215Targets that do not support write prefetches or locality hints can ignore
5216the values of operands 1 and 2.
5217
5218@cindex @code{blockage} instruction pattern
5219@item @samp{blockage}
5220
5221This pattern defines a pseudo insn that prevents the instruction
5222scheduler from moving instructions across the boundary defined by the
5223blockage insn.  Normally an UNSPEC_VOLATILE pattern.
5224
5225@cindex @code{memory_barrier} instruction pattern
5226@item @samp{memory_barrier}
5227
5228If the target memory model is not fully synchronous, then this pattern
5229should be defined to an instruction that orders both loads and stores
5230before the instruction with respect to loads and stores after the instruction.
5231This pattern has no operands.
5232
5233@cindex @code{sync_compare_and_swap@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5234@item @samp{sync_compare_and_swap@var{mode}}
5235
5236This pattern, if defined, emits code for an atomic compare-and-swap
5237operation.  Operand 1 is the memory on which the atomic operation is
5238performed.  Operand 2 is the ``old'' value to be compared against the
5239current contents of the memory location.  Operand 3 is the ``new'' value
5240to store in the memory if the compare succeeds.  Operand 0 is the result
5241of the operation; it should contain the contents of the memory
5242before the operation.  If the compare succeeds, this should obviously be
5243a copy of operand 2.
5244
5245This pattern must show that both operand 0 and operand 1 are modified.
5246
5247This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that all
5248memory operations before the atomic operation occur before the atomic
5249operation and all memory operations after the atomic operation occur
5250after the atomic operation.
5251
5252For targets where the success or failure of the compare-and-swap
5253operation is available via the status flags, it is possible to
5254avoid a separate compare operation and issue the subsequent
5255branch or store-flag operation immediately after the compare-and-swap.
5256To this end, GCC will look for a @code{MODE_CC} set in the
5257output of @code{sync_compare_and_swap@var{mode}}; if the machine
5258description includes such a set, the target should also define special
5259@code{cbranchcc4} and/or @code{cstorecc4} instructions.  GCC will then
5260be able to take the destination of the @code{MODE_CC} set and pass it
5261to the @code{cbranchcc4} or @code{cstorecc4} pattern as the first
5262operand of the comparison (the second will be @code{(const_int 0)}).
5263
5264@cindex @code{sync_add@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5265@cindex @code{sync_sub@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5266@cindex @code{sync_ior@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5267@cindex @code{sync_and@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5268@cindex @code{sync_xor@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5269@cindex @code{sync_nand@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5270@item @samp{sync_add@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_sub@var{mode}}
5271@itemx @samp{sync_ior@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_and@var{mode}}
5272@itemx @samp{sync_xor@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_nand@var{mode}}
5273
5274These patterns emit code for an atomic operation on memory.
5275Operand 0 is the memory on which the atomic operation is performed.
5276Operand 1 is the second operand to the binary operator.
5277
5278This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that all
5279memory operations before the atomic operation occur before the atomic
5280operation and all memory operations after the atomic operation occur
5281after the atomic operation.
5282
5283If these patterns are not defined, the operation will be constructed
5284from a compare-and-swap operation, if defined.
5285
5286@cindex @code{sync_old_add@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5287@cindex @code{sync_old_sub@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5288@cindex @code{sync_old_ior@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5289@cindex @code{sync_old_and@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5290@cindex @code{sync_old_xor@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5291@cindex @code{sync_old_nand@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5292@item @samp{sync_old_add@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_old_sub@var{mode}}
5293@itemx @samp{sync_old_ior@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_old_and@var{mode}}
5294@itemx @samp{sync_old_xor@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_old_nand@var{mode}}
5295
5296These patterns are emit code for an atomic operation on memory,
5297and return the value that the memory contained before the operation.
5298Operand 0 is the result value, operand 1 is the memory on which the
5299atomic operation is performed, and operand 2 is the second operand
5300to the binary operator.
5301
5302This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that all
5303memory operations before the atomic operation occur before the atomic
5304operation and all memory operations after the atomic operation occur
5305after the atomic operation.
5306
5307If these patterns are not defined, the operation will be constructed
5308from a compare-and-swap operation, if defined.
5309
5310@cindex @code{sync_new_add@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5311@cindex @code{sync_new_sub@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5312@cindex @code{sync_new_ior@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5313@cindex @code{sync_new_and@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5314@cindex @code{sync_new_xor@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5315@cindex @code{sync_new_nand@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5316@item @samp{sync_new_add@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_new_sub@var{mode}}
5317@itemx @samp{sync_new_ior@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_new_and@var{mode}}
5318@itemx @samp{sync_new_xor@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_new_nand@var{mode}}
5319
5320These patterns are like their @code{sync_old_@var{op}} counterparts,
5321except that they return the value that exists in the memory location
5322after the operation, rather than before the operation.
5323
5324@cindex @code{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5325@item @samp{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}}
5326
5327This pattern takes two forms, based on the capabilities of the target.
5328In either case, operand 0 is the result of the operand, operand 1 is
5329the memory on which the atomic operation is performed, and operand 2
5330is the value to set in the lock.
5331
5332In the ideal case, this operation is an atomic exchange operation, in
5333which the previous value in memory operand is copied into the result
5334operand, and the value operand is stored in the memory operand.
5335
5336For less capable targets, any value operand that is not the constant 1
5337should be rejected with @code{FAIL}.  In this case the target may use
5338an atomic test-and-set bit operation.  The result operand should contain
53391 if the bit was previously set and 0 if the bit was previously clear.
5340The true contents of the memory operand are implementation defined.
5341
5342This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that the
5343pattern as a whole acts as an acquire barrier, that is all memory
5344operations after the pattern do not occur until the lock is acquired.
5345
5346If this pattern is not defined, the operation will be constructed from
5347a compare-and-swap operation, if defined.
5348
5349@cindex @code{sync_lock_release@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5350@item @samp{sync_lock_release@var{mode}}
5351
5352This pattern, if defined, releases a lock set by
5353@code{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}}.  Operand 0 is the memory
5354that contains the lock; operand 1 is the value to store in the lock.
5355
5356If the target doesn't implement full semantics for
5357@code{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}}, any value operand which is not
5358the constant 0 should be rejected with @code{FAIL}, and the true contents
5359of the memory operand are implementation defined.
5360
5361This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that the
5362pattern as a whole acts as a release barrier, that is the lock is
5363released only after all previous memory operations have completed.
5364
5365If this pattern is not defined, then a @code{memory_barrier} pattern
5366will be emitted, followed by a store of the value to the memory operand.
5367
5368@cindex @code{stack_protect_set} instruction pattern
5369@item @samp{stack_protect_set}
5370
5371This pattern, if defined, moves a @code{Pmode} value from the memory
5372in operand 1 to the memory in operand 0 without leaving the value in
5373a register afterward.  This is to avoid leaking the value some place
5374that an attacker might use to rewrite the stack guard slot after
5375having clobbered it.
5376
5377If this pattern is not defined, then a plain move pattern is generated.
5378
5379@cindex @code{stack_protect_test} instruction pattern
5380@item @samp{stack_protect_test}
5381
5382This pattern, if defined, compares a @code{Pmode} value from the
5383memory in operand 1 with the memory in operand 0 without leaving the
5384value in a register afterward and branches to operand 2 if the values
5385weren't equal.
5386
5387If this pattern is not defined, then a plain compare pattern and
5388conditional branch pattern is used.
5389
5390@cindex @code{clear_cache} instruction pattern
5391@item @samp{clear_cache}
5392
5393This pattern, if defined, flushes the instruction cache for a region of
5394memory.  The region is bounded to by the Pmode pointers in operand 0
5395inclusive and operand 1 exclusive.
5396
5397If this pattern is not defined, a call to the library function
5398@code{__clear_cache} is used.
5399
5400@end table
5401
5402@end ifset
5403@c Each of the following nodes are wrapped in separate
5404@c "@ifset INTERNALS" to work around memory limits for the default
5405@c configuration in older tetex distributions.  Known to not work:
5406@c tetex-1.0.7, known to work: tetex-2.0.2.
5407@ifset INTERNALS
5408@node Pattern Ordering
5409@section When the Order of Patterns Matters
5410@cindex Pattern Ordering
5411@cindex Ordering of Patterns
5412
5413Sometimes an insn can match more than one instruction pattern.  Then the
5414pattern that appears first in the machine description is the one used.
5415Therefore, more specific patterns (patterns that will match fewer things)
5416and faster instructions (those that will produce better code when they
5417do match) should usually go first in the description.
5418
5419In some cases the effect of ordering the patterns can be used to hide
5420a pattern when it is not valid.  For example, the 68000 has an
5421instruction for converting a fullword to floating point and another
5422for converting a byte to floating point.  An instruction converting
5423an integer to floating point could match either one.  We put the
5424pattern to convert the fullword first to make sure that one will
5425be used rather than the other.  (Otherwise a large integer might
5426be generated as a single-byte immediate quantity, which would not work.)
5427Instead of using this pattern ordering it would be possible to make the
5428pattern for convert-a-byte smart enough to deal properly with any
5429constant value.
5430
5431@end ifset
5432@ifset INTERNALS
5433@node Dependent Patterns
5434@section Interdependence of Patterns
5435@cindex Dependent Patterns
5436@cindex Interdependence of Patterns
5437
5438In some cases machines support instructions identical except for the
5439machine mode of one or more operands.  For example, there may be
5440``sign-extend halfword'' and ``sign-extend byte'' instructions whose
5441patterns are
5442
5443@smallexample
5444(set (match_operand:SI 0 @dots{})
5445     (extend:SI (match_operand:HI 1 @dots{})))
5446
5447(set (match_operand:SI 0 @dots{})
5448     (extend:SI (match_operand:QI 1 @dots{})))
5449@end smallexample
5450
5451@noindent
5452Constant integers do not specify a machine mode, so an instruction to
5453extend a constant value could match either pattern.  The pattern it
5454actually will match is the one that appears first in the file.  For correct
5455results, this must be the one for the widest possible mode (@code{HImode},
5456here).  If the pattern matches the @code{QImode} instruction, the results
5457will be incorrect if the constant value does not actually fit that mode.
5458
5459Such instructions to extend constants are rarely generated because they are
5460optimized away, but they do occasionally happen in nonoptimized
5461compilations.
5462
5463If a constraint in a pattern allows a constant, the reload pass may
5464replace a register with a constant permitted by the constraint in some
5465cases.  Similarly for memory references.  Because of this substitution,
5466you should not provide separate patterns for increment and decrement
5467instructions.  Instead, they should be generated from the same pattern
5468that supports register-register add insns by examining the operands and
5469generating the appropriate machine instruction.
5470
5471@end ifset
5472@ifset INTERNALS
5473@node Jump Patterns
5474@section Defining Jump Instruction Patterns
5475@cindex jump instruction patterns
5476@cindex defining jump instruction patterns
5477
5478GCC does not assume anything about how the machine realizes jumps.
5479The machine description should define a single pattern, usually
5480a @code{define_expand}, which expands to all the required insns.
5481
5482Usually, this would be a comparison insn to set the condition code
5483and a separate branch insn testing the condition code and branching
5484or not according to its value.  For many machines, however,
5485separating compares and branches is limiting, which is why the
5486more flexible approach with one @code{define_expand} is used in GCC.
5487The machine description becomes clearer for architectures that
5488have compare-and-branch instructions but no condition code.  It also
5489works better when different sets of comparison operators are supported
5490by different kinds of conditional branches (e.g. integer vs. floating-point),
5491or by conditional branches with respect to conditional stores.
5492
5493Two separate insns are always used if the machine description represents
5494a condition code register using the legacy RTL expression @code{(cc0)},
5495and on most machines that use a separate condition code register
5496(@pxref{Condition Code}).  For machines that use @code{(cc0)}, in
5497fact, the set and use of the condition code must be separate and
5498adjacent@footnote{@code{note} insns can separate them, though.}, thus
5499allowing flags in @code{cc_status} to be used (@pxref{Condition Code}) and
5500so that the comparison and branch insns could be located from each other
5501by using the functions @code{prev_cc0_setter} and @code{next_cc0_user}.
5502
5503Even in this case having a single entry point for conditional branches
5504is advantageous, because it handles equally well the case where a single
5505comparison instruction records the results of both signed and unsigned
5506comparison of the given operands (with the branch insns coming in distinct
5507signed and unsigned flavors) as in the x86 or SPARC, and the case where
5508there are distinct signed and unsigned compare instructions and only
5509one set of conditional branch instructions as in the PowerPC.
5510
5511@end ifset
5512@ifset INTERNALS
5513@node Looping Patterns
5514@section Defining Looping Instruction Patterns
5515@cindex looping instruction patterns
5516@cindex defining looping instruction patterns
5517
5518Some machines have special jump instructions that can be utilized to
5519make loops more efficient.  A common example is the 68000 @samp{dbra}
5520instruction which performs a decrement of a register and a branch if the
5521result was greater than zero.  Other machines, in particular digital
5522signal processors (DSPs), have special block repeat instructions to
5523provide low-overhead loop support.  For example, the TI TMS320C3x/C4x
5524DSPs have a block repeat instruction that loads special registers to
5525mark the top and end of a loop and to count the number of loop
5526iterations.  This avoids the need for fetching and executing a
5527@samp{dbra}-like instruction and avoids pipeline stalls associated with
5528the jump.
5529
5530GCC has three special named patterns to support low overhead looping.
5531They are @samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero}, @samp{doloop_begin},
5532and @samp{doloop_end}.  The first pattern,
5533@samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero}, is not emitted during RTL
5534generation but may be emitted during the instruction combination phase.
5535This requires the assistance of the loop optimizer, using information
5536collected during strength reduction, to reverse a loop to count down to
5537zero.  Some targets also require the loop optimizer to add a
5538@code{REG_NONNEG} note to indicate that the iteration count is always
5539positive.  This is needed if the target performs a signed loop
5540termination test.  For example, the 68000 uses a pattern similar to the
5541following for its @code{dbra} instruction:
5542
5543@smallexample
5544@group
5545(define_insn "decrement_and_branch_until_zero"
5546  [(set (pc)
5547        (if_then_else
5548          (ge (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "+d*am")
5549                       (const_int -1))
5550              (const_int 0))
5551          (label_ref (match_operand 1 "" ""))
5552          (pc)))
5553   (set (match_dup 0)
5554        (plus:SI (match_dup 0)
5555                 (const_int -1)))]
5556  "find_reg_note (insn, REG_NONNEG, 0)"
5557  "@dots{}")
5558@end group
5559@end smallexample
5560
5561Note that since the insn is both a jump insn and has an output, it must
5562deal with its own reloads, hence the `m' constraints.  Also note that
5563since this insn is generated by the instruction combination phase
5564combining two sequential insns together into an implicit parallel insn,
5565the iteration counter needs to be biased by the same amount as the
5566decrement operation, in this case @minus{}1.  Note that the following similar
5567pattern will not be matched by the combiner.
5568
5569@smallexample
5570@group
5571(define_insn "decrement_and_branch_until_zero"
5572  [(set (pc)
5573        (if_then_else
5574          (ge (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "+d*am")
5575              (const_int 1))
5576          (label_ref (match_operand 1 "" ""))
5577          (pc)))
5578   (set (match_dup 0)
5579        (plus:SI (match_dup 0)
5580                 (const_int -1)))]
5581  "find_reg_note (insn, REG_NONNEG, 0)"
5582  "@dots{}")
5583@end group
5584@end smallexample
5585
5586The other two special looping patterns, @samp{doloop_begin} and
5587@samp{doloop_end}, are emitted by the loop optimizer for certain
5588well-behaved loops with a finite number of loop iterations using
5589information collected during strength reduction.
5590
5591The @samp{doloop_end} pattern describes the actual looping instruction
5592(or the implicit looping operation) and the @samp{doloop_begin} pattern
5593is an optional companion pattern that can be used for initialization
5594needed for some low-overhead looping instructions.
5595
5596Note that some machines require the actual looping instruction to be
5597emitted at the top of the loop (e.g., the TMS320C3x/C4x DSPs).  Emitting
5598the true RTL for a looping instruction at the top of the loop can cause
5599problems with flow analysis.  So instead, a dummy @code{doloop} insn is
5600emitted at the end of the loop.  The machine dependent reorg pass checks
5601for the presence of this @code{doloop} insn and then searches back to
5602the top of the loop, where it inserts the true looping insn (provided
5603there are no instructions in the loop which would cause problems).  Any
5604additional labels can be emitted at this point.  In addition, if the
5605desired special iteration counter register was not allocated, this
5606machine dependent reorg pass could emit a traditional compare and jump
5607instruction pair.
5608
5609The essential difference between the
5610@samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero} and the @samp{doloop_end}
5611patterns is that the loop optimizer allocates an additional pseudo
5612register for the latter as an iteration counter.  This pseudo register
5613cannot be used within the loop (i.e., general induction variables cannot
5614be derived from it), however, in many cases the loop induction variable
5615may become redundant and removed by the flow pass.
5616
5617
5618@end ifset
5619@ifset INTERNALS
5620@node Insn Canonicalizations
5621@section Canonicalization of Instructions
5622@cindex canonicalization of instructions
5623@cindex insn canonicalization
5624
5625There are often cases where multiple RTL expressions could represent an
5626operation performed by a single machine instruction.  This situation is
5627most commonly encountered with logical, branch, and multiply-accumulate
5628instructions.  In such cases, the compiler attempts to convert these
5629multiple RTL expressions into a single canonical form to reduce the
5630number of insn patterns required.
5631
5632In addition to algebraic simplifications, following canonicalizations
5633are performed:
5634
5635@itemize @bullet
5636@item
5637For commutative and comparison operators, a constant is always made the
5638second operand.  If a machine only supports a constant as the second
5639operand, only patterns that match a constant in the second operand need
5640be supplied.
5641
5642@item
5643For associative operators, a sequence of operators will always chain
5644to the left; for instance, only the left operand of an integer @code{plus}
5645can itself be a @code{plus}.  @code{and}, @code{ior}, @code{xor},
5646@code{plus}, @code{mult}, @code{smin}, @code{smax}, @code{umin}, and
5647@code{umax} are associative when applied to integers, and sometimes to
5648floating-point.
5649
5650@item
5651@cindex @code{neg}, canonicalization of
5652@cindex @code{not}, canonicalization of
5653@cindex @code{mult}, canonicalization of
5654@cindex @code{plus}, canonicalization of
5655@cindex @code{minus}, canonicalization of
5656For these operators, if only one operand is a @code{neg}, @code{not},
5657@code{mult}, @code{plus}, or @code{minus} expression, it will be the
5658first operand.
5659
5660@item
5661In combinations of @code{neg}, @code{mult}, @code{plus}, and
5662@code{minus}, the @code{neg} operations (if any) will be moved inside
5663the operations as far as possible.  For instance,
5664@code{(neg (mult A B))} is canonicalized as @code{(mult (neg A) B)}, but
5665@code{(plus (mult (neg B) C) A)} is canonicalized as
5666@code{(minus A (mult B C))}.
5667
5668@cindex @code{compare}, canonicalization of
5669@item
5670For the @code{compare} operator, a constant is always the second operand
5671if the first argument is a condition code register or @code{(cc0)}.
5672
5673@item
5674An operand of @code{neg}, @code{not}, @code{mult}, @code{plus}, or
5675@code{minus} is made the first operand under the same conditions as
5676above.
5677
5678@item
5679@code{(ltu (plus @var{a} @var{b}) @var{b})} is converted to
5680@code{(ltu (plus @var{a} @var{b}) @var{a})}. Likewise with @code{geu} instead
5681of @code{ltu}.
5682
5683@item
5684@code{(minus @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))} is converted to
5685@code{(plus @var{x} (const_int @var{-n}))}.
5686
5687@item
5688Within address computations (i.e., inside @code{mem}), a left shift is
5689converted into the appropriate multiplication by a power of two.
5690
5691@cindex @code{ior}, canonicalization of
5692@cindex @code{and}, canonicalization of
5693@cindex De Morgan's law
5694@item
5695De Morgan's Law is used to move bitwise negation inside a bitwise
5696logical-and or logical-or operation.  If this results in only one
5697operand being a @code{not} expression, it will be the first one.
5698
5699A machine that has an instruction that performs a bitwise logical-and of one
5700operand with the bitwise negation of the other should specify the pattern
5701for that instruction as
5702
5703@smallexample
5704(define_insn ""
5705  [(set (match_operand:@var{m} 0 @dots{})
5706        (and:@var{m} (not:@var{m} (match_operand:@var{m} 1 @dots{}))
5707                     (match_operand:@var{m} 2 @dots{})))]
5708  "@dots{}"
5709  "@dots{}")
5710@end smallexample
5711
5712@noindent
5713Similarly, a pattern for a ``NAND'' instruction should be written
5714
5715@smallexample
5716(define_insn ""
5717  [(set (match_operand:@var{m} 0 @dots{})
5718        (ior:@var{m} (not:@var{m} (match_operand:@var{m} 1 @dots{}))
5719                     (not:@var{m} (match_operand:@var{m} 2 @dots{}))))]
5720  "@dots{}"
5721  "@dots{}")
5722@end smallexample
5723
5724In both cases, it is not necessary to include patterns for the many
5725logically equivalent RTL expressions.
5726
5727@cindex @code{xor}, canonicalization of
5728@item
5729The only possible RTL expressions involving both bitwise exclusive-or
5730and bitwise negation are @code{(xor:@var{m} @var{x} @var{y})}
5731and @code{(not:@var{m} (xor:@var{m} @var{x} @var{y}))}.
5732
5733@item
5734The sum of three items, one of which is a constant, will only appear in
5735the form
5736
5737@smallexample
5738(plus:@var{m} (plus:@var{m} @var{x} @var{y}) @var{constant})
5739@end smallexample
5740
5741@cindex @code{zero_extract}, canonicalization of
5742@cindex @code{sign_extract}, canonicalization of
5743@item
5744Equality comparisons of a group of bits (usually a single bit) with zero
5745will be written using @code{zero_extract} rather than the equivalent
5746@code{and} or @code{sign_extract} operations.
5747
5748@end itemize
5749
5750Further canonicalization rules are defined in the function
5751@code{commutative_operand_precedence} in @file{gcc/rtlanal.c}.
5752
5753@end ifset
5754@ifset INTERNALS
5755@node Expander Definitions
5756@section Defining RTL Sequences for Code Generation
5757@cindex expander definitions
5758@cindex code generation RTL sequences
5759@cindex defining RTL sequences for code generation
5760
5761On some target machines, some standard pattern names for RTL generation
5762cannot be handled with single insn, but a sequence of RTL insns can
5763represent them.  For these target machines, you can write a
5764@code{define_expand} to specify how to generate the sequence of RTL@.
5765
5766@findex define_expand
5767A @code{define_expand} is an RTL expression that looks almost like a
5768@code{define_insn}; but, unlike the latter, a @code{define_expand} is used
5769only for RTL generation and it can produce more than one RTL insn.
5770
5771A @code{define_expand} RTX has four operands:
5772
5773@itemize @bullet
5774@item
5775The name.  Each @code{define_expand} must have a name, since the only
5776use for it is to refer to it by name.
5777
5778@item
5779The RTL template.  This is a vector of RTL expressions representing
5780a sequence of separate instructions.  Unlike @code{define_insn}, there
5781is no implicit surrounding @code{PARALLEL}.
5782
5783@item
5784The condition, a string containing a C expression.  This expression is
5785used to express how the availability of this pattern depends on
5786subclasses of target machine, selected by command-line options when GCC
5787is run.  This is just like the condition of a @code{define_insn} that
5788has a standard name.  Therefore, the condition (if present) may not
5789depend on the data in the insn being matched, but only the
5790target-machine-type flags.  The compiler needs to test these conditions
5791during initialization in order to learn exactly which named instructions
5792are available in a particular run.
5793
5794@item
5795The preparation statements, a string containing zero or more C
5796statements which are to be executed before RTL code is generated from
5797the RTL template.
5798
5799Usually these statements prepare temporary registers for use as
5800internal operands in the RTL template, but they can also generate RTL
5801insns directly by calling routines such as @code{emit_insn}, etc.
5802Any such insns precede the ones that come from the RTL template.
5803@end itemize
5804
5805Every RTL insn emitted by a @code{define_expand} must match some
5806@code{define_insn} in the machine description.  Otherwise, the compiler
5807will crash when trying to generate code for the insn or trying to optimize
5808it.
5809
5810The RTL template, in addition to controlling generation of RTL insns,
5811also describes the operands that need to be specified when this pattern
5812is used.  In particular, it gives a predicate for each operand.
5813
5814A true operand, which needs to be specified in order to generate RTL from
5815the pattern, should be described with a @code{match_operand} in its first
5816occurrence in the RTL template.  This enters information on the operand's
5817predicate into the tables that record such things.  GCC uses the
5818information to preload the operand into a register if that is required for
5819valid RTL code.  If the operand is referred to more than once, subsequent
5820references should use @code{match_dup}.
5821
5822The RTL template may also refer to internal ``operands'' which are
5823temporary registers or labels used only within the sequence made by the
5824@code{define_expand}.  Internal operands are substituted into the RTL
5825template with @code{match_dup}, never with @code{match_operand}.  The
5826values of the internal operands are not passed in as arguments by the
5827compiler when it requests use of this pattern.  Instead, they are computed
5828within the pattern, in the preparation statements.  These statements
5829compute the values and store them into the appropriate elements of
5830@code{operands} so that @code{match_dup} can find them.
5831
5832There are two special macros defined for use in the preparation statements:
5833@code{DONE} and @code{FAIL}.  Use them with a following semicolon,
5834as a statement.
5835
5836@table @code
5837
5838@findex DONE
5839@item DONE
5840Use the @code{DONE} macro to end RTL generation for the pattern.  The
5841only RTL insns resulting from the pattern on this occasion will be
5842those already emitted by explicit calls to @code{emit_insn} within the
5843preparation statements; the RTL template will not be generated.
5844
5845@findex FAIL
5846@item FAIL
5847Make the pattern fail on this occasion.  When a pattern fails, it means
5848that the pattern was not truly available.  The calling routines in the
5849compiler will try other strategies for code generation using other patterns.
5850
5851Failure is currently supported only for binary (addition, multiplication,
5852shifting, etc.) and bit-field (@code{extv}, @code{extzv}, and @code{insv})
5853operations.
5854@end table
5855
5856If the preparation falls through (invokes neither @code{DONE} nor
5857@code{FAIL}), then the @code{define_expand} acts like a
5858@code{define_insn} in that the RTL template is used to generate the
5859insn.
5860
5861The RTL template is not used for matching, only for generating the
5862initial insn list.  If the preparation statement always invokes
5863@code{DONE} or @code{FAIL}, the RTL template may be reduced to a simple
5864list of operands, such as this example:
5865
5866@smallexample
5867@group
5868(define_expand "addsi3"
5869  [(match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "")
5870   (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "")
5871   (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "")]
5872@end group
5873@group
5874  ""
5875  "
5876@{
5877  handle_add (operands[0], operands[1], operands[2]);
5878  DONE;
5879@}")
5880@end group
5881@end smallexample
5882
5883Here is an example, the definition of left-shift for the SPUR chip:
5884
5885@smallexample
5886@group
5887(define_expand "ashlsi3"
5888  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "")
5889        (ashift:SI
5890@end group
5891@group
5892          (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "")
5893          (match_operand:SI 2 "nonmemory_operand" "")))]
5894  ""
5895  "
5896@end group
5897@end smallexample
5898
5899@smallexample
5900@group
5901@{
5902  if (GET_CODE (operands[2]) != CONST_INT
5903      || (unsigned) INTVAL (operands[2]) > 3)
5904    FAIL;
5905@}")
5906@end group
5907@end smallexample
5908
5909@noindent
5910This example uses @code{define_expand} so that it can generate an RTL insn
5911for shifting when the shift-count is in the supported range of 0 to 3 but
5912fail in other cases where machine insns aren't available.  When it fails,
5913the compiler tries another strategy using different patterns (such as, a
5914library call).
5915
5916If the compiler were able to handle nontrivial condition-strings in
5917patterns with names, then it would be possible to use a
5918@code{define_insn} in that case.  Here is another case (zero-extension
5919on the 68000) which makes more use of the power of @code{define_expand}:
5920
5921@smallexample
5922(define_expand "zero_extendhisi2"
5923  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "")
5924        (const_int 0))
5925   (set (strict_low_part
5926          (subreg:HI
5927            (match_dup 0)
5928            0))
5929        (match_operand:HI 1 "general_operand" ""))]
5930  ""
5931  "operands[1] = make_safe_from (operands[1], operands[0]);")
5932@end smallexample
5933
5934@noindent
5935@findex make_safe_from
5936Here two RTL insns are generated, one to clear the entire output operand
5937and the other to copy the input operand into its low half.  This sequence
5938is incorrect if the input operand refers to [the old value of] the output
5939operand, so the preparation statement makes sure this isn't so.  The
5940function @code{make_safe_from} copies the @code{operands[1]} into a
5941temporary register if it refers to @code{operands[0]}.  It does this
5942by emitting another RTL insn.
5943
5944Finally, a third example shows the use of an internal operand.
5945Zero-extension on the SPUR chip is done by @code{and}-ing the result
5946against a halfword mask.  But this mask cannot be represented by a
5947@code{const_int} because the constant value is too large to be legitimate
5948on this machine.  So it must be copied into a register with
5949@code{force_reg} and then the register used in the @code{and}.
5950
5951@smallexample
5952(define_expand "zero_extendhisi2"
5953  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "")
5954        (and:SI (subreg:SI
5955                  (match_operand:HI 1 "register_operand" "")
5956                  0)
5957                (match_dup 2)))]
5958  ""
5959  "operands[2]
5960     = force_reg (SImode, GEN_INT (65535)); ")
5961@end smallexample
5962
5963@emph{Note:} If the @code{define_expand} is used to serve a
5964standard binary or unary arithmetic operation or a bit-field operation,
5965then the last insn it generates must not be a @code{code_label},
5966@code{barrier} or @code{note}.  It must be an @code{insn},
5967@code{jump_insn} or @code{call_insn}.  If you don't need a real insn
5968at the end, emit an insn to copy the result of the operation into
5969itself.  Such an insn will generate no code, but it can avoid problems
5970in the compiler.
5971
5972@end ifset
5973@ifset INTERNALS
5974@node Insn Splitting
5975@section Defining How to Split Instructions
5976@cindex insn splitting
5977@cindex instruction splitting
5978@cindex splitting instructions
5979
5980There are two cases where you should specify how to split a pattern
5981into multiple insns.  On machines that have instructions requiring
5982delay slots (@pxref{Delay Slots}) or that have instructions whose
5983output is not available for multiple cycles (@pxref{Processor pipeline
5984description}), the compiler phases that optimize these cases need to
5985be able to move insns into one-instruction delay slots.  However, some
5986insns may generate more than one machine instruction.  These insns
5987cannot be placed into a delay slot.
5988
5989Often you can rewrite the single insn as a list of individual insns,
5990each corresponding to one machine instruction.  The disadvantage of
5991doing so is that it will cause the compilation to be slower and require
5992more space.  If the resulting insns are too complex, it may also
5993suppress some optimizations.  The compiler splits the insn if there is a
5994reason to believe that it might improve instruction or delay slot
5995scheduling.
5996
5997The insn combiner phase also splits putative insns.  If three insns are
5998merged into one insn with a complex expression that cannot be matched by
5999some @code{define_insn} pattern, the combiner phase attempts to split
6000the complex pattern into two insns that are recognized.  Usually it can
6001break the complex pattern into two patterns by splitting out some
6002subexpression.  However, in some other cases, such as performing an
6003addition of a large constant in two insns on a RISC machine, the way to
6004split the addition into two insns is machine-dependent.
6005
6006@findex define_split
6007The @code{define_split} definition tells the compiler how to split a
6008complex insn into several simpler insns.  It looks like this:
6009
6010@smallexample
6011(define_split
6012  [@var{insn-pattern}]
6013  "@var{condition}"
6014  [@var{new-insn-pattern-1}
6015   @var{new-insn-pattern-2}
6016   @dots{}]
6017  "@var{preparation-statements}")
6018@end smallexample
6019
6020@var{insn-pattern} is a pattern that needs to be split and
6021@var{condition} is the final condition to be tested, as in a
6022@code{define_insn}.  When an insn matching @var{insn-pattern} and
6023satisfying @var{condition} is found, it is replaced in the insn list
6024with the insns given by @var{new-insn-pattern-1},
6025@var{new-insn-pattern-2}, etc.
6026
6027The @var{preparation-statements} are similar to those statements that
6028are specified for @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions})
6029and are executed before the new RTL is generated to prepare for the
6030generated code or emit some insns whose pattern is not fixed.  Unlike
6031those in @code{define_expand}, however, these statements must not
6032generate any new pseudo-registers.  Once reload has completed, they also
6033must not allocate any space in the stack frame.
6034
6035Patterns are matched against @var{insn-pattern} in two different
6036circumstances.  If an insn needs to be split for delay slot scheduling
6037or insn scheduling, the insn is already known to be valid, which means
6038that it must have been matched by some @code{define_insn} and, if
6039@code{reload_completed} is nonzero, is known to satisfy the constraints
6040of that @code{define_insn}.  In that case, the new insn patterns must
6041also be insns that are matched by some @code{define_insn} and, if
6042@code{reload_completed} is nonzero, must also satisfy the constraints
6043of those definitions.
6044
6045As an example of this usage of @code{define_split}, consider the following
6046example from @file{a29k.md}, which splits a @code{sign_extend} from
6047@code{HImode} to @code{SImode} into a pair of shift insns:
6048
6049@smallexample
6050(define_split
6051  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "gen_reg_operand" "")
6052        (sign_extend:SI (match_operand:HI 1 "gen_reg_operand" "")))]
6053  ""
6054  [(set (match_dup 0)
6055        (ashift:SI (match_dup 1)
6056                   (const_int 16)))
6057   (set (match_dup 0)
6058        (ashiftrt:SI (match_dup 0)
6059                     (const_int 16)))]
6060  "
6061@{ operands[1] = gen_lowpart (SImode, operands[1]); @}")
6062@end smallexample
6063
6064When the combiner phase tries to split an insn pattern, it is always the
6065case that the pattern is @emph{not} matched by any @code{define_insn}.
6066The combiner pass first tries to split a single @code{set} expression
6067and then the same @code{set} expression inside a @code{parallel}, but
6068followed by a @code{clobber} of a pseudo-reg to use as a scratch
6069register.  In these cases, the combiner expects exactly two new insn
6070patterns to be generated.  It will verify that these patterns match some
6071@code{define_insn} definitions, so you need not do this test in the
6072@code{define_split} (of course, there is no point in writing a
6073@code{define_split} that will never produce insns that match).
6074
6075Here is an example of this use of @code{define_split}, taken from
6076@file{rs6000.md}:
6077
6078@smallexample
6079(define_split
6080  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "gen_reg_operand" "")
6081        (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "gen_reg_operand" "")
6082                 (match_operand:SI 2 "non_add_cint_operand" "")))]
6083  ""
6084  [(set (match_dup 0) (plus:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 3)))
6085   (set (match_dup 0) (plus:SI (match_dup 0) (match_dup 4)))]
6086"
6087@{
6088  int low = INTVAL (operands[2]) & 0xffff;
6089  int high = (unsigned) INTVAL (operands[2]) >> 16;
6090
6091  if (low & 0x8000)
6092    high++, low |= 0xffff0000;
6093
6094  operands[3] = GEN_INT (high << 16);
6095  operands[4] = GEN_INT (low);
6096@}")
6097@end smallexample
6098
6099Here the predicate @code{non_add_cint_operand} matches any
6100@code{const_int} that is @emph{not} a valid operand of a single add
6101insn.  The add with the smaller displacement is written so that it
6102can be substituted into the address of a subsequent operation.
6103
6104An example that uses a scratch register, from the same file, generates
6105an equality comparison of a register and a large constant:
6106
6107@smallexample
6108(define_split
6109  [(set (match_operand:CC 0 "cc_reg_operand" "")
6110        (compare:CC (match_operand:SI 1 "gen_reg_operand" "")
6111                    (match_operand:SI 2 "non_short_cint_operand" "")))
6112   (clobber (match_operand:SI 3 "gen_reg_operand" ""))]
6113  "find_single_use (operands[0], insn, 0)
6114   && (GET_CODE (*find_single_use (operands[0], insn, 0)) == EQ
6115       || GET_CODE (*find_single_use (operands[0], insn, 0)) == NE)"
6116  [(set (match_dup 3) (xor:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 4)))
6117   (set (match_dup 0) (compare:CC (match_dup 3) (match_dup 5)))]
6118  "
6119@{
6120  /* @r{Get the constant we are comparing against, C, and see what it
6121     looks like sign-extended to 16 bits.  Then see what constant
6122     could be XOR'ed with C to get the sign-extended value.}  */
6123
6124  int c = INTVAL (operands[2]);
6125  int sextc = (c << 16) >> 16;
6126  int xorv = c ^ sextc;
6127
6128  operands[4] = GEN_INT (xorv);
6129  operands[5] = GEN_INT (sextc);
6130@}")
6131@end smallexample
6132
6133To avoid confusion, don't write a single @code{define_split} that
6134accepts some insns that match some @code{define_insn} as well as some
6135insns that don't.  Instead, write two separate @code{define_split}
6136definitions, one for the insns that are valid and one for the insns that
6137are not valid.
6138
6139The splitter is allowed to split jump instructions into sequence of
6140jumps or create new jumps in while splitting non-jump instructions.  As
6141the central flowgraph and branch prediction information needs to be updated,
6142several restriction apply.
6143
6144Splitting of jump instruction into sequence that over by another jump
6145instruction is always valid, as compiler expect identical behavior of new
6146jump.  When new sequence contains multiple jump instructions or new labels,
6147more assistance is needed.  Splitter is required to create only unconditional
6148jumps, or simple conditional jump instructions.  Additionally it must attach a
6149@code{REG_BR_PROB} note to each conditional jump.  A global variable
6150@code{split_branch_probability} holds the probability of the original branch in case
6151it was a simple conditional jump, @minus{}1 otherwise.  To simplify
6152recomputing of edge frequencies, the new sequence is required to have only
6153forward jumps to the newly created labels.
6154
6155@findex define_insn_and_split
6156For the common case where the pattern of a define_split exactly matches the
6157pattern of a define_insn, use @code{define_insn_and_split}.  It looks like
6158this:
6159
6160@smallexample
6161(define_insn_and_split
6162  [@var{insn-pattern}]
6163  "@var{condition}"
6164  "@var{output-template}"
6165  "@var{split-condition}"
6166  [@var{new-insn-pattern-1}
6167   @var{new-insn-pattern-2}
6168   @dots{}]
6169  "@var{preparation-statements}"
6170  [@var{insn-attributes}])
6171
6172@end smallexample
6173
6174@var{insn-pattern}, @var{condition}, @var{output-template}, and
6175@var{insn-attributes} are used as in @code{define_insn}.  The
6176@var{new-insn-pattern} vector and the @var{preparation-statements} are used as
6177in a @code{define_split}.  The @var{split-condition} is also used as in
6178@code{define_split}, with the additional behavior that if the condition starts
6179with @samp{&&}, the condition used for the split will be the constructed as a
6180logical ``and'' of the split condition with the insn condition.  For example,
6181from i386.md:
6182
6183@smallexample
6184(define_insn_and_split "zero_extendhisi2_and"
6185  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "=r")
6186     (zero_extend:SI (match_operand:HI 1 "register_operand" "0")))
6187   (clobber (reg:CC 17))]
6188  "TARGET_ZERO_EXTEND_WITH_AND && !optimize_size"
6189  "#"
6190  "&& reload_completed"
6191  [(parallel [(set (match_dup 0)
6192                   (and:SI (match_dup 0) (const_int 65535)))
6193              (clobber (reg:CC 17))])]
6194  ""
6195  [(set_attr "type" "alu1")])
6196
6197@end smallexample
6198
6199In this case, the actual split condition will be
6200@samp{TARGET_ZERO_EXTEND_WITH_AND && !optimize_size && reload_completed}.
6201
6202The @code{define_insn_and_split} construction provides exactly the same
6203functionality as two separate @code{define_insn} and @code{define_split}
6204patterns.  It exists for compactness, and as a maintenance tool to prevent
6205having to ensure the two patterns' templates match.
6206
6207@end ifset
6208@ifset INTERNALS
6209@node Including Patterns
6210@section Including Patterns in Machine Descriptions.
6211@cindex insn includes
6212
6213@findex include
6214The @code{include} pattern tells the compiler tools where to
6215look for patterns that are in files other than in the file
6216@file{.md}.  This is used only at build time and there is no preprocessing allowed.
6217
6218It looks like:
6219
6220@smallexample
6221
6222(include
6223  @var{pathname})
6224@end smallexample
6225
6226For example:
6227
6228@smallexample
6229
6230(include "filestuff")
6231
6232@end smallexample
6233
6234Where @var{pathname} is a string that specifies the location of the file,
6235specifies the include file to be in @file{gcc/config/target/filestuff}.  The
6236directory @file{gcc/config/target} is regarded as the default directory.
6237
6238
6239Machine descriptions may be split up into smaller more manageable subsections
6240and placed into subdirectories.
6241
6242By specifying:
6243
6244@smallexample
6245
6246(include "BOGUS/filestuff")
6247
6248@end smallexample
6249
6250the include file is specified to be in @file{gcc/config/@var{target}/BOGUS/filestuff}.
6251
6252Specifying an absolute path for the include file such as;
6253@smallexample
6254
6255(include "/u2/BOGUS/filestuff")
6256
6257@end smallexample
6258is permitted but is not encouraged.
6259
6260@subsection RTL Generation Tool Options for Directory Search
6261@cindex directory options .md
6262@cindex options, directory search
6263@cindex search options
6264
6265The @option{-I@var{dir}} option specifies directories to search for machine descriptions.
6266For example:
6267
6268@smallexample
6269
6270genrecog -I/p1/abc/proc1 -I/p2/abcd/pro2 target.md
6271
6272@end smallexample
6273
6274
6275Add the directory @var{dir} to the head of the list of directories to be
6276searched for header files.  This can be used to override a system machine definition
6277file, substituting your own version, since these directories are
6278searched before the default machine description file directories.  If you use more than
6279one @option{-I} option, the directories are scanned in left-to-right
6280order; the standard default directory come after.
6281
6282
6283@end ifset
6284@ifset INTERNALS
6285@node Peephole Definitions
6286@section Machine-Specific Peephole Optimizers
6287@cindex peephole optimizer definitions
6288@cindex defining peephole optimizers
6289
6290In addition to instruction patterns the @file{md} file may contain
6291definitions of machine-specific peephole optimizations.
6292
6293The combiner does not notice certain peephole optimizations when the data
6294flow in the program does not suggest that it should try them.  For example,
6295sometimes two consecutive insns related in purpose can be combined even
6296though the second one does not appear to use a register computed in the
6297first one.  A machine-specific peephole optimizer can detect such
6298opportunities.
6299
6300There are two forms of peephole definitions that may be used.  The
6301original @code{define_peephole} is run at assembly output time to
6302match insns and substitute assembly text.  Use of @code{define_peephole}
6303is deprecated.
6304
6305A newer @code{define_peephole2} matches insns and substitutes new
6306insns.  The @code{peephole2} pass is run after register allocation
6307but before scheduling, which may result in much better code for
6308targets that do scheduling.
6309
6310@menu
6311* define_peephole::     RTL to Text Peephole Optimizers
6312* define_peephole2::    RTL to RTL Peephole Optimizers
6313@end menu
6314
6315@end ifset
6316@ifset INTERNALS
6317@node define_peephole
6318@subsection RTL to Text Peephole Optimizers
6319@findex define_peephole
6320
6321@need 1000
6322A definition looks like this:
6323
6324@smallexample
6325(define_peephole
6326  [@var{insn-pattern-1}
6327   @var{insn-pattern-2}
6328   @dots{}]
6329  "@var{condition}"
6330  "@var{template}"
6331  "@var{optional-insn-attributes}")
6332@end smallexample
6333
6334@noindent
6335The last string operand may be omitted if you are not using any
6336machine-specific information in this machine description.  If present,
6337it must obey the same rules as in a @code{define_insn}.
6338
6339In this skeleton, @var{insn-pattern-1} and so on are patterns to match
6340consecutive insns.  The optimization applies to a sequence of insns when
6341@var{insn-pattern-1} matches the first one, @var{insn-pattern-2} matches
6342the next, and so on.
6343
6344Each of the insns matched by a peephole must also match a
6345@code{define_insn}.  Peepholes are checked only at the last stage just
6346before code generation, and only optionally.  Therefore, any insn which
6347would match a peephole but no @code{define_insn} will cause a crash in code
6348generation in an unoptimized compilation, or at various optimization
6349stages.
6350
6351The operands of the insns are matched with @code{match_operands},
6352@code{match_operator}, and @code{match_dup}, as usual.  What is not
6353usual is that the operand numbers apply to all the insn patterns in the
6354definition.  So, you can check for identical operands in two insns by
6355using @code{match_operand} in one insn and @code{match_dup} in the
6356other.
6357
6358The operand constraints used in @code{match_operand} patterns do not have
6359any direct effect on the applicability of the peephole, but they will
6360be validated afterward, so make sure your constraints are general enough
6361to apply whenever the peephole matches.  If the peephole matches
6362but the constraints are not satisfied, the compiler will crash.
6363
6364It is safe to omit constraints in all the operands of the peephole; or
6365you can write constraints which serve as a double-check on the criteria
6366previously tested.
6367
6368Once a sequence of insns matches the patterns, the @var{condition} is
6369checked.  This is a C expression which makes the final decision whether to
6370perform the optimization (we do so if the expression is nonzero).  If
6371@var{condition} is omitted (in other words, the string is empty) then the
6372optimization is applied to every sequence of insns that matches the
6373patterns.
6374
6375The defined peephole optimizations are applied after register allocation
6376is complete.  Therefore, the peephole definition can check which
6377operands have ended up in which kinds of registers, just by looking at
6378the operands.
6379
6380@findex prev_active_insn
6381The way to refer to the operands in @var{condition} is to write
6382@code{operands[@var{i}]} for operand number @var{i} (as matched by
6383@code{(match_operand @var{i} @dots{})}).  Use the variable @code{insn}
6384to refer to the last of the insns being matched; use
6385@code{prev_active_insn} to find the preceding insns.
6386
6387@findex dead_or_set_p
6388When optimizing computations with intermediate results, you can use
6389@var{condition} to match only when the intermediate results are not used
6390elsewhere.  Use the C expression @code{dead_or_set_p (@var{insn},
6391@var{op})}, where @var{insn} is the insn in which you expect the value
6392to be used for the last time (from the value of @code{insn}, together
6393with use of @code{prev_nonnote_insn}), and @var{op} is the intermediate
6394value (from @code{operands[@var{i}]}).
6395
6396Applying the optimization means replacing the sequence of insns with one
6397new insn.  The @var{template} controls ultimate output of assembler code
6398for this combined insn.  It works exactly like the template of a
6399@code{define_insn}.  Operand numbers in this template are the same ones
6400used in matching the original sequence of insns.
6401
6402The result of a defined peephole optimizer does not need to match any of
6403the insn patterns in the machine description; it does not even have an
6404opportunity to match them.  The peephole optimizer definition itself serves
6405as the insn pattern to control how the insn is output.
6406
6407Defined peephole optimizers are run as assembler code is being output,
6408so the insns they produce are never combined or rearranged in any way.
6409
6410Here is an example, taken from the 68000 machine description:
6411
6412@smallexample
6413(define_peephole
6414  [(set (reg:SI 15) (plus:SI (reg:SI 15) (const_int 4)))
6415   (set (match_operand:DF 0 "register_operand" "=f")
6416        (match_operand:DF 1 "register_operand" "ad"))]
6417  "FP_REG_P (operands[0]) && ! FP_REG_P (operands[1])"
6418@{
6419  rtx xoperands[2];
6420  xoperands[1] = gen_rtx_REG (SImode, REGNO (operands[1]) + 1);
6421#ifdef MOTOROLA
6422  output_asm_insn ("move.l %1,(sp)", xoperands);
6423  output_asm_insn ("move.l %1,-(sp)", operands);
6424  return "fmove.d (sp)+,%0";
6425#else
6426  output_asm_insn ("movel %1,sp@@", xoperands);
6427  output_asm_insn ("movel %1,sp@@-", operands);
6428  return "fmoved sp@@+,%0";
6429#endif
6430@})
6431@end smallexample
6432
6433@need 1000
6434The effect of this optimization is to change
6435
6436@smallexample
6437@group
6438jbsr _foobar
6439addql #4,sp
6440movel d1,sp@@-
6441movel d0,sp@@-
6442fmoved sp@@+,fp0
6443@end group
6444@end smallexample
6445
6446@noindent
6447into
6448
6449@smallexample
6450@group
6451jbsr _foobar
6452movel d1,sp@@
6453movel d0,sp@@-
6454fmoved sp@@+,fp0
6455@end group
6456@end smallexample
6457
6458@ignore
6459@findex CC_REVERSED
6460If a peephole matches a sequence including one or more jump insns, you must
6461take account of the flags such as @code{CC_REVERSED} which specify that the
6462condition codes are represented in an unusual manner.  The compiler
6463automatically alters any ordinary conditional jumps which occur in such
6464situations, but the compiler cannot alter jumps which have been replaced by
6465peephole optimizations.  So it is up to you to alter the assembler code
6466that the peephole produces.  Supply C code to write the assembler output,
6467and in this C code check the condition code status flags and change the
6468assembler code as appropriate.
6469@end ignore
6470
6471@var{insn-pattern-1} and so on look @emph{almost} like the second
6472operand of @code{define_insn}.  There is one important difference: the
6473second operand of @code{define_insn} consists of one or more RTX's
6474enclosed in square brackets.  Usually, there is only one: then the same
6475action can be written as an element of a @code{define_peephole}.  But
6476when there are multiple actions in a @code{define_insn}, they are
6477implicitly enclosed in a @code{parallel}.  Then you must explicitly
6478write the @code{parallel}, and the square brackets within it, in the
6479@code{define_peephole}.  Thus, if an insn pattern looks like this,
6480
6481@smallexample
6482(define_insn "divmodsi4"
6483  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=d")
6484        (div:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0")
6485                (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "dmsK")))
6486   (set (match_operand:SI 3 "general_operand" "=d")
6487        (mod:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 2)))]
6488  "TARGET_68020"
6489  "divsl%.l %2,%3:%0")
6490@end smallexample
6491
6492@noindent
6493then the way to mention this insn in a peephole is as follows:
6494
6495@smallexample
6496(define_peephole
6497  [@dots{}
6498   (parallel
6499    [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=d")
6500          (div:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0")
6501                  (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "dmsK")))
6502     (set (match_operand:SI 3 "general_operand" "=d")
6503          (mod:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 2)))])
6504   @dots{}]
6505  @dots{})
6506@end smallexample
6507
6508@end ifset
6509@ifset INTERNALS
6510@node define_peephole2
6511@subsection RTL to RTL Peephole Optimizers
6512@findex define_peephole2
6513
6514The @code{define_peephole2} definition tells the compiler how to
6515substitute one sequence of instructions for another sequence,
6516what additional scratch registers may be needed and what their
6517lifetimes must be.
6518
6519@smallexample
6520(define_peephole2
6521  [@var{insn-pattern-1}
6522   @var{insn-pattern-2}
6523   @dots{}]
6524  "@var{condition}"
6525  [@var{new-insn-pattern-1}
6526   @var{new-insn-pattern-2}
6527   @dots{}]
6528  "@var{preparation-statements}")
6529@end smallexample
6530
6531The definition is almost identical to @code{define_split}
6532(@pxref{Insn Splitting}) except that the pattern to match is not a
6533single instruction, but a sequence of instructions.
6534
6535It is possible to request additional scratch registers for use in the
6536output template.  If appropriate registers are not free, the pattern
6537will simply not match.
6538
6539@findex match_scratch
6540@findex match_dup
6541Scratch registers are requested with a @code{match_scratch} pattern at
6542the top level of the input pattern.  The allocated register (initially) will
6543be dead at the point requested within the original sequence.  If the scratch
6544is used at more than a single point, a @code{match_dup} pattern at the
6545top level of the input pattern marks the last position in the input sequence
6546at which the register must be available.
6547
6548Here is an example from the IA-32 machine description:
6549
6550@smallexample
6551(define_peephole2
6552  [(match_scratch:SI 2 "r")
6553   (parallel [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "")
6554                   (match_operator:SI 3 "arith_or_logical_operator"
6555                     [(match_dup 0)
6556                      (match_operand:SI 1 "memory_operand" "")]))
6557              (clobber (reg:CC 17))])]
6558  "! optimize_size && ! TARGET_READ_MODIFY"
6559  [(set (match_dup 2) (match_dup 1))
6560   (parallel [(set (match_dup 0)
6561                   (match_op_dup 3 [(match_dup 0) (match_dup 2)]))
6562              (clobber (reg:CC 17))])]
6563  "")
6564@end smallexample
6565
6566@noindent
6567This pattern tries to split a load from its use in the hopes that we'll be
6568able to schedule around the memory load latency.  It allocates a single
6569@code{SImode} register of class @code{GENERAL_REGS} (@code{"r"}) that needs
6570to be live only at the point just before the arithmetic.
6571
6572A real example requiring extended scratch lifetimes is harder to come by,
6573so here's a silly made-up example:
6574
6575@smallexample
6576(define_peephole2
6577  [(match_scratch:SI 4 "r")
6578   (set (match_operand:SI 0 "" "") (match_operand:SI 1 "" ""))
6579   (set (match_operand:SI 2 "" "") (match_dup 1))
6580   (match_dup 4)
6581   (set (match_operand:SI 3 "" "") (match_dup 1))]
6582  "/* @r{determine 1 does not overlap 0 and 2} */"
6583  [(set (match_dup 4) (match_dup 1))
6584   (set (match_dup 0) (match_dup 4))
6585   (set (match_dup 2) (match_dup 4))]
6586   (set (match_dup 3) (match_dup 4))]
6587  "")
6588@end smallexample
6589
6590@noindent
6591If we had not added the @code{(match_dup 4)} in the middle of the input
6592sequence, it might have been the case that the register we chose at the
6593beginning of the sequence is killed by the first or second @code{set}.
6594
6595@end ifset
6596@ifset INTERNALS
6597@node Insn Attributes
6598@section Instruction Attributes
6599@cindex insn attributes
6600@cindex instruction attributes
6601
6602In addition to describing the instruction supported by the target machine,
6603the @file{md} file also defines a group of @dfn{attributes} and a set of
6604values for each.  Every generated insn is assigned a value for each attribute.
6605One possible attribute would be the effect that the insn has on the machine's
6606condition code.  This attribute can then be used by @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}
6607to track the condition codes.
6608
6609@menu
6610* Defining Attributes:: Specifying attributes and their values.
6611* Expressions::         Valid expressions for attribute values.
6612* Tagging Insns::       Assigning attribute values to insns.
6613* Attr Example::        An example of assigning attributes.
6614* Insn Lengths::        Computing the length of insns.
6615* Constant Attributes:: Defining attributes that are constant.
6616* Delay Slots::         Defining delay slots required for a machine.
6617* Processor pipeline description:: Specifying information for insn scheduling.
6618@end menu
6619
6620@end ifset
6621@ifset INTERNALS
6622@node Defining Attributes
6623@subsection Defining Attributes and their Values
6624@cindex defining attributes and their values
6625@cindex attributes, defining
6626
6627@findex define_attr
6628The @code{define_attr} expression is used to define each attribute required
6629by the target machine.  It looks like:
6630
6631@smallexample
6632(define_attr @var{name} @var{list-of-values} @var{default})
6633@end smallexample
6634
6635@var{name} is a string specifying the name of the attribute being defined.
6636
6637@var{list-of-values} is either a string that specifies a comma-separated
6638list of values that can be assigned to the attribute, or a null string to
6639indicate that the attribute takes numeric values.
6640
6641@var{default} is an attribute expression that gives the value of this
6642attribute for insns that match patterns whose definition does not include
6643an explicit value for this attribute.  @xref{Attr Example}, for more
6644information on the handling of defaults.  @xref{Constant Attributes},
6645for information on attributes that do not depend on any particular insn.
6646
6647@findex insn-attr.h
6648For each defined attribute, a number of definitions are written to the
6649@file{insn-attr.h} file.  For cases where an explicit set of values is
6650specified for an attribute, the following are defined:
6651
6652@itemize @bullet
6653@item
6654A @samp{#define} is written for the symbol @samp{HAVE_ATTR_@var{name}}.
6655
6656@item
6657An enumerated class is defined for @samp{attr_@var{name}} with
6658elements of the form @samp{@var{upper-name}_@var{upper-value}} where
6659the attribute name and value are first converted to uppercase.
6660
6661@item
6662A function @samp{get_attr_@var{name}} is defined that is passed an insn and
6663returns the attribute value for that insn.
6664@end itemize
6665
6666For example, if the following is present in the @file{md} file:
6667
6668@smallexample
6669(define_attr "type" "branch,fp,load,store,arith" @dots{})
6670@end smallexample
6671
6672@noindent
6673the following lines will be written to the file @file{insn-attr.h}.
6674
6675@smallexample
6676#define HAVE_ATTR_type
6677enum attr_type @{TYPE_BRANCH, TYPE_FP, TYPE_LOAD,
6678                 TYPE_STORE, TYPE_ARITH@};
6679extern enum attr_type get_attr_type ();
6680@end smallexample
6681
6682If the attribute takes numeric values, no @code{enum} type will be
6683defined and the function to obtain the attribute's value will return
6684@code{int}.
6685
6686There are attributes which are tied to a specific meaning.  These
6687attributes are not free to use for other purposes:
6688
6689@table @code
6690@item length
6691The @code{length} attribute is used to calculate the length of emitted
6692code chunks.  This is especially important when verifying branch
6693distances. @xref{Insn Lengths}.
6694
6695@item enabled
6696The @code{enabled} attribute can be defined to prevent certain
6697alternatives of an insn definition from being used during code
6698generation. @xref{Disable Insn Alternatives}.
6699
6700@end table
6701
6702@end ifset
6703@ifset INTERNALS
6704@node Expressions
6705@subsection Attribute Expressions
6706@cindex attribute expressions
6707
6708RTL expressions used to define attributes use the codes described above
6709plus a few specific to attribute definitions, to be discussed below.
6710Attribute value expressions must have one of the following forms:
6711
6712@table @code
6713@cindex @code{const_int} and attributes
6714@item (const_int @var{i})
6715The integer @var{i} specifies the value of a numeric attribute.  @var{i}
6716must be non-negative.
6717
6718The value of a numeric attribute can be specified either with a
6719@code{const_int}, or as an integer represented as a string in
6720@code{const_string}, @code{eq_attr} (see below), @code{attr},
6721@code{symbol_ref}, simple arithmetic expressions, and @code{set_attr}
6722overrides on specific instructions (@pxref{Tagging Insns}).
6723
6724@cindex @code{const_string} and attributes
6725@item (const_string @var{value})
6726The string @var{value} specifies a constant attribute value.
6727If @var{value} is specified as @samp{"*"}, it means that the default value of
6728the attribute is to be used for the insn containing this expression.
6729@samp{"*"} obviously cannot be used in the @var{default} expression
6730of a @code{define_attr}.
6731
6732If the attribute whose value is being specified is numeric, @var{value}
6733must be a string containing a non-negative integer (normally
6734@code{const_int} would be used in this case).  Otherwise, it must
6735contain one of the valid values for the attribute.
6736
6737@cindex @code{if_then_else} and attributes
6738@item (if_then_else @var{test} @var{true-value} @var{false-value})
6739@var{test} specifies an attribute test, whose format is defined below.
6740The value of this expression is @var{true-value} if @var{test} is true,
6741otherwise it is @var{false-value}.
6742
6743@cindex @code{cond} and attributes
6744@item (cond [@var{test1} @var{value1} @dots{}] @var{default})
6745The first operand of this expression is a vector containing an even
6746number of expressions and consisting of pairs of @var{test} and @var{value}
6747expressions.  The value of the @code{cond} expression is that of the
6748@var{value} corresponding to the first true @var{test} expression.  If
6749none of the @var{test} expressions are true, the value of the @code{cond}
6750expression is that of the @var{default} expression.
6751@end table
6752
6753@var{test} expressions can have one of the following forms:
6754
6755@table @code
6756@cindex @code{const_int} and attribute tests
6757@item (const_int @var{i})
6758This test is true if @var{i} is nonzero and false otherwise.
6759
6760@cindex @code{not} and attributes
6761@cindex @code{ior} and attributes
6762@cindex @code{and} and attributes
6763@item (not @var{test})
6764@itemx (ior @var{test1} @var{test2})
6765@itemx (and @var{test1} @var{test2})
6766These tests are true if the indicated logical function is true.
6767
6768@cindex @code{match_operand} and attributes
6769@item (match_operand:@var{m} @var{n} @var{pred} @var{constraints})
6770This test is true if operand @var{n} of the insn whose attribute value
6771is being determined has mode @var{m} (this part of the test is ignored
6772if @var{m} is @code{VOIDmode}) and the function specified by the string
6773@var{pred} returns a nonzero value when passed operand @var{n} and mode
6774@var{m} (this part of the test is ignored if @var{pred} is the null
6775string).
6776
6777The @var{constraints} operand is ignored and should be the null string.
6778
6779@cindex @code{le} and attributes
6780@cindex @code{leu} and attributes
6781@cindex @code{lt} and attributes
6782@cindex @code{gt} and attributes
6783@cindex @code{gtu} and attributes
6784@cindex @code{ge} and attributes
6785@cindex @code{geu} and attributes
6786@cindex @code{ne} and attributes
6787@cindex @code{eq} and attributes
6788@cindex @code{plus} and attributes
6789@cindex @code{minus} and attributes
6790@cindex @code{mult} and attributes
6791@cindex @code{div} and attributes
6792@cindex @code{mod} and attributes
6793@cindex @code{abs} and attributes
6794@cindex @code{neg} and attributes
6795@cindex @code{ashift} and attributes
6796@cindex @code{lshiftrt} and attributes
6797@cindex @code{ashiftrt} and attributes
6798@item (le @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6799@itemx (leu @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6800@itemx (lt @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6801@itemx (ltu @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6802@itemx (gt @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6803@itemx (gtu @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6804@itemx (ge @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6805@itemx (geu @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6806@itemx (ne @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6807@itemx (eq @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6808These tests are true if the indicated comparison of the two arithmetic
6809expressions is true.  Arithmetic expressions are formed with
6810@code{plus}, @code{minus}, @code{mult}, @code{div}, @code{mod},
6811@code{abs}, @code{neg}, @code{and}, @code{ior}, @code{xor}, @code{not},
6812@code{ashift}, @code{lshiftrt}, and @code{ashiftrt} expressions.
6813
6814@findex get_attr
6815@code{const_int} and @code{symbol_ref} are always valid terms (@pxref{Insn
6816Lengths},for additional forms).  @code{symbol_ref} is a string
6817denoting a C expression that yields an @code{int} when evaluated by the
6818@samp{get_attr_@dots{}} routine.  It should normally be a global
6819variable.
6820
6821@findex eq_attr
6822@item (eq_attr @var{name} @var{value})
6823@var{name} is a string specifying the name of an attribute.
6824
6825@var{value} is a string that is either a valid value for attribute
6826@var{name}, a comma-separated list of values, or @samp{!} followed by a
6827value or list.  If @var{value} does not begin with a @samp{!}, this
6828test is true if the value of the @var{name} attribute of the current
6829insn is in the list specified by @var{value}.  If @var{value} begins
6830with a @samp{!}, this test is true if the attribute's value is
6831@emph{not} in the specified list.
6832
6833For example,
6834
6835@smallexample
6836(eq_attr "type" "load,store")
6837@end smallexample
6838
6839@noindent
6840is equivalent to
6841
6842@smallexample
6843(ior (eq_attr "type" "load") (eq_attr "type" "store"))
6844@end smallexample
6845
6846If @var{name} specifies an attribute of @samp{alternative}, it refers to the
6847value of the compiler variable @code{which_alternative}
6848(@pxref{Output Statement}) and the values must be small integers.  For
6849example,
6850
6851@smallexample
6852(eq_attr "alternative" "2,3")
6853@end smallexample
6854
6855@noindent
6856is equivalent to
6857
6858@smallexample
6859(ior (eq (symbol_ref "which_alternative") (const_int 2))
6860     (eq (symbol_ref "which_alternative") (const_int 3)))
6861@end smallexample
6862
6863Note that, for most attributes, an @code{eq_attr} test is simplified in cases
6864where the value of the attribute being tested is known for all insns matching
6865a particular pattern.  This is by far the most common case.
6866
6867@findex attr_flag
6868@item (attr_flag @var{name})
6869The value of an @code{attr_flag} expression is true if the flag
6870specified by @var{name} is true for the @code{insn} currently being
6871scheduled.
6872
6873@var{name} is a string specifying one of a fixed set of flags to test.
6874Test the flags @code{forward} and @code{backward} to determine the
6875direction of a conditional branch.  Test the flags @code{very_likely},
6876@code{likely}, @code{very_unlikely}, and @code{unlikely} to determine
6877if a conditional branch is expected to be taken.
6878
6879If the @code{very_likely} flag is true, then the @code{likely} flag is also
6880true.  Likewise for the @code{very_unlikely} and @code{unlikely} flags.
6881
6882This example describes a conditional branch delay slot which
6883can be nullified for forward branches that are taken (annul-true) or
6884for backward branches which are not taken (annul-false).
6885
6886@smallexample
6887(define_delay (eq_attr "type" "cbranch")
6888  [(eq_attr "in_branch_delay" "true")
6889   (and (eq_attr "in_branch_delay" "true")
6890        (attr_flag "forward"))
6891   (and (eq_attr "in_branch_delay" "true")
6892        (attr_flag "backward"))])
6893@end smallexample
6894
6895The @code{forward} and @code{backward} flags are false if the current
6896@code{insn} being scheduled is not a conditional branch.
6897
6898The @code{very_likely} and @code{likely} flags are true if the
6899@code{insn} being scheduled is not a conditional branch.
6900The @code{very_unlikely} and @code{unlikely} flags are false if the
6901@code{insn} being scheduled is not a conditional branch.
6902
6903@code{attr_flag} is only used during delay slot scheduling and has no
6904meaning to other passes of the compiler.
6905
6906@findex attr
6907@item (attr @var{name})
6908The value of another attribute is returned.  This is most useful
6909for numeric attributes, as @code{eq_attr} and @code{attr_flag}
6910produce more efficient code for non-numeric attributes.
6911@end table
6912
6913@end ifset
6914@ifset INTERNALS
6915@node Tagging Insns
6916@subsection Assigning Attribute Values to Insns
6917@cindex tagging insns
6918@cindex assigning attribute values to insns
6919
6920The value assigned to an attribute of an insn is primarily determined by
6921which pattern is matched by that insn (or which @code{define_peephole}
6922generated it).  Every @code{define_insn} and @code{define_peephole} can
6923have an optional last argument to specify the values of attributes for
6924matching insns.  The value of any attribute not specified in a particular
6925insn is set to the default value for that attribute, as specified in its
6926@code{define_attr}.  Extensive use of default values for attributes
6927permits the specification of the values for only one or two attributes
6928in the definition of most insn patterns, as seen in the example in the
6929next section.
6930
6931The optional last argument of @code{define_insn} and
6932@code{define_peephole} is a vector of expressions, each of which defines
6933the value for a single attribute.  The most general way of assigning an
6934attribute's value is to use a @code{set} expression whose first operand is an
6935@code{attr} expression giving the name of the attribute being set.  The
6936second operand of the @code{set} is an attribute expression
6937(@pxref{Expressions}) giving the value of the attribute.
6938
6939When the attribute value depends on the @samp{alternative} attribute
6940(i.e., which is the applicable alternative in the constraint of the
6941insn), the @code{set_attr_alternative} expression can be used.  It
6942allows the specification of a vector of attribute expressions, one for
6943each alternative.
6944
6945@findex set_attr
6946When the generality of arbitrary attribute expressions is not required,
6947the simpler @code{set_attr} expression can be used, which allows
6948specifying a string giving either a single attribute value or a list
6949of attribute values, one for each alternative.
6950
6951The form of each of the above specifications is shown below.  In each case,
6952@var{name} is a string specifying the attribute to be set.
6953
6954@table @code
6955@item (set_attr @var{name} @var{value-string})
6956@var{value-string} is either a string giving the desired attribute value,
6957or a string containing a comma-separated list giving the values for
6958succeeding alternatives.  The number of elements must match the number
6959of alternatives in the constraint of the insn pattern.
6960
6961Note that it may be useful to specify @samp{*} for some alternative, in
6962which case the attribute will assume its default value for insns matching
6963that alternative.
6964
6965@findex set_attr_alternative
6966@item (set_attr_alternative @var{name} [@var{value1} @var{value2} @dots{}])
6967Depending on the alternative of the insn, the value will be one of the
6968specified values.  This is a shorthand for using a @code{cond} with
6969tests on the @samp{alternative} attribute.
6970
6971@findex attr
6972@item (set (attr @var{name}) @var{value})
6973The first operand of this @code{set} must be the special RTL expression
6974@code{attr}, whose sole operand is a string giving the name of the
6975attribute being set.  @var{value} is the value of the attribute.
6976@end table
6977
6978The following shows three different ways of representing the same
6979attribute value specification:
6980
6981@smallexample
6982(set_attr "type" "load,store,arith")
6983
6984(set_attr_alternative "type"
6985                      [(const_string "load") (const_string "store")
6986                       (const_string "arith")])
6987
6988(set (attr "type")
6989     (cond [(eq_attr "alternative" "1") (const_string "load")
6990            (eq_attr "alternative" "2") (const_string "store")]
6991           (const_string "arith")))
6992@end smallexample
6993
6994@need 1000
6995@findex define_asm_attributes
6996The @code{define_asm_attributes} expression provides a mechanism to
6997specify the attributes assigned to insns produced from an @code{asm}
6998statement.  It has the form:
6999
7000@smallexample
7001(define_asm_attributes [@var{attr-sets}])
7002@end smallexample
7003
7004@noindent
7005where @var{attr-sets} is specified the same as for both the
7006@code{define_insn} and the @code{define_peephole} expressions.
7007
7008These values will typically be the ``worst case'' attribute values.  For
7009example, they might indicate that the condition code will be clobbered.
7010
7011A specification for a @code{length} attribute is handled specially.  The
7012way to compute the length of an @code{asm} insn is to multiply the
7013length specified in the expression @code{define_asm_attributes} by the
7014number of machine instructions specified in the @code{asm} statement,
7015determined by counting the number of semicolons and newlines in the
7016string.  Therefore, the value of the @code{length} attribute specified
7017in a @code{define_asm_attributes} should be the maximum possible length
7018of a single machine instruction.
7019
7020@end ifset
7021@ifset INTERNALS
7022@node Attr Example
7023@subsection Example of Attribute Specifications
7024@cindex attribute specifications example
7025@cindex attribute specifications
7026
7027The judicious use of defaulting is important in the efficient use of
7028insn attributes.  Typically, insns are divided into @dfn{types} and an
7029attribute, customarily called @code{type}, is used to represent this
7030value.  This attribute is normally used only to define the default value
7031for other attributes.  An example will clarify this usage.
7032
7033Assume we have a RISC machine with a condition code and in which only
7034full-word operations are performed in registers.  Let us assume that we
7035can divide all insns into loads, stores, (integer) arithmetic
7036operations, floating point operations, and branches.
7037
7038Here we will concern ourselves with determining the effect of an insn on
7039the condition code and will limit ourselves to the following possible
7040effects:  The condition code can be set unpredictably (clobbered), not
7041be changed, be set to agree with the results of the operation, or only
7042changed if the item previously set into the condition code has been
7043modified.
7044
7045Here is part of a sample @file{md} file for such a machine:
7046
7047@smallexample
7048(define_attr "type" "load,store,arith,fp,branch" (const_string "arith"))
7049
7050(define_attr "cc" "clobber,unchanged,set,change0"
7051             (cond [(eq_attr "type" "load")
7052                        (const_string "change0")
7053                    (eq_attr "type" "store,branch")
7054                        (const_string "unchanged")
7055                    (eq_attr "type" "arith")
7056                        (if_then_else (match_operand:SI 0 "" "")
7057                                      (const_string "set")
7058                                      (const_string "clobber"))]
7059                   (const_string "clobber")))
7060
7061(define_insn ""
7062  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,r,m")
7063        (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "r,m,r"))]
7064  ""
7065  "@@
7066   move %0,%1
7067   load %0,%1
7068   store %0,%1"
7069  [(set_attr "type" "arith,load,store")])
7070@end smallexample
7071
7072Note that we assume in the above example that arithmetic operations
7073performed on quantities smaller than a machine word clobber the condition
7074code since they will set the condition code to a value corresponding to the
7075full-word result.
7076
7077@end ifset
7078@ifset INTERNALS
7079@node Insn Lengths
7080@subsection Computing the Length of an Insn
7081@cindex insn lengths, computing
7082@cindex computing the length of an insn
7083
7084For many machines, multiple types of branch instructions are provided, each
7085for different length branch displacements.  In most cases, the assembler
7086will choose the correct instruction to use.  However, when the assembler
7087cannot do so, GCC can when a special attribute, the @code{length}
7088attribute, is defined.  This attribute must be defined to have numeric
7089values by specifying a null string in its @code{define_attr}.
7090
7091In the case of the @code{length} attribute, two additional forms of
7092arithmetic terms are allowed in test expressions:
7093
7094@table @code
7095@cindex @code{match_dup} and attributes
7096@item (match_dup @var{n})
7097This refers to the address of operand @var{n} of the current insn, which
7098must be a @code{label_ref}.
7099
7100@cindex @code{pc} and attributes
7101@item (pc)
7102This refers to the address of the @emph{current} insn.  It might have
7103been more consistent with other usage to make this the address of the
7104@emph{next} insn but this would be confusing because the length of the
7105current insn is to be computed.
7106@end table
7107
7108@cindex @code{addr_vec}, length of
7109@cindex @code{addr_diff_vec}, length of
7110For normal insns, the length will be determined by value of the
7111@code{length} attribute.  In the case of @code{addr_vec} and
7112@code{addr_diff_vec} insn patterns, the length is computed as
7113the number of vectors multiplied by the size of each vector.
7114
7115Lengths are measured in addressable storage units (bytes).
7116
7117The following macros can be used to refine the length computation:
7118
7119@table @code
7120@findex ADJUST_INSN_LENGTH
7121@item ADJUST_INSN_LENGTH (@var{insn}, @var{length})
7122If defined, modifies the length assigned to instruction @var{insn} as a
7123function of the context in which it is used.  @var{length} is an lvalue
7124that contains the initially computed length of the insn and should be
7125updated with the correct length of the insn.
7126
7127This macro will normally not be required.  A case in which it is
7128required is the ROMP@.  On this machine, the size of an @code{addr_vec}
7129insn must be increased by two to compensate for the fact that alignment
7130may be required.
7131@end table
7132
7133@findex get_attr_length
7134The routine that returns @code{get_attr_length} (the value of the
7135@code{length} attribute) can be used by the output routine to
7136determine the form of the branch instruction to be written, as the
7137example below illustrates.
7138
7139As an example of the specification of variable-length branches, consider
7140the IBM 360.  If we adopt the convention that a register will be set to
7141the starting address of a function, we can jump to labels within 4k of
7142the start using a four-byte instruction.  Otherwise, we need a six-byte
7143sequence to load the address from memory and then branch to it.
7144
7145On such a machine, a pattern for a branch instruction might be specified
7146as follows:
7147
7148@smallexample
7149(define_insn "jump"
7150  [(set (pc)
7151        (label_ref (match_operand 0 "" "")))]
7152  ""
7153@{
7154   return (get_attr_length (insn) == 4
7155           ? "b %l0" : "l r15,=a(%l0); br r15");
7156@}
7157  [(set (attr "length")
7158        (if_then_else (lt (match_dup 0) (const_int 4096))
7159                      (const_int 4)
7160                      (const_int 6)))])
7161@end smallexample
7162
7163@end ifset
7164@ifset INTERNALS
7165@node Constant Attributes
7166@subsection Constant Attributes
7167@cindex constant attributes
7168
7169A special form of @code{define_attr}, where the expression for the
7170default value is a @code{const} expression, indicates an attribute that
7171is constant for a given run of the compiler.  Constant attributes may be
7172used to specify which variety of processor is used.  For example,
7173
7174@smallexample
7175(define_attr "cpu" "m88100,m88110,m88000"
7176 (const
7177  (cond [(symbol_ref "TARGET_88100") (const_string "m88100")
7178         (symbol_ref "TARGET_88110") (const_string "m88110")]
7179        (const_string "m88000"))))
7180
7181(define_attr "memory" "fast,slow"
7182 (const
7183  (if_then_else (symbol_ref "TARGET_FAST_MEM")
7184                (const_string "fast")
7185                (const_string "slow"))))
7186@end smallexample
7187
7188The routine generated for constant attributes has no parameters as it
7189does not depend on any particular insn.  RTL expressions used to define
7190the value of a constant attribute may use the @code{symbol_ref} form,
7191but may not use either the @code{match_operand} form or @code{eq_attr}
7192forms involving insn attributes.
7193
7194@end ifset
7195@ifset INTERNALS
7196@node Delay Slots
7197@subsection Delay Slot Scheduling
7198@cindex delay slots, defining
7199
7200The insn attribute mechanism can be used to specify the requirements for
7201delay slots, if any, on a target machine.  An instruction is said to
7202require a @dfn{delay slot} if some instructions that are physically
7203after the instruction are executed as if they were located before it.
7204Classic examples are branch and call instructions, which often execute
7205the following instruction before the branch or call is performed.
7206
7207On some machines, conditional branch instructions can optionally
7208@dfn{annul} instructions in the delay slot.  This means that the
7209instruction will not be executed for certain branch outcomes.  Both
7210instructions that annul if the branch is true and instructions that
7211annul if the branch is false are supported.
7212
7213Delay slot scheduling differs from instruction scheduling in that
7214determining whether an instruction needs a delay slot is dependent only
7215on the type of instruction being generated, not on data flow between the
7216instructions.  See the next section for a discussion of data-dependent
7217instruction scheduling.
7218
7219@findex define_delay
7220The requirement of an insn needing one or more delay slots is indicated
7221via the @code{define_delay} expression.  It has the following form:
7222
7223@smallexample
7224(define_delay @var{test}
7225              [@var{delay-1} @var{annul-true-1} @var{annul-false-1}
7226               @var{delay-2} @var{annul-true-2} @var{annul-false-2}
7227               @dots{}])
7228@end smallexample
7229
7230@var{test} is an attribute test that indicates whether this
7231@code{define_delay} applies to a particular insn.  If so, the number of
7232required delay slots is determined by the length of the vector specified
7233as the second argument.  An insn placed in delay slot @var{n} must
7234satisfy attribute test @var{delay-n}.  @var{annul-true-n} is an
7235attribute test that specifies which insns may be annulled if the branch
7236is true.  Similarly, @var{annul-false-n} specifies which insns in the
7237delay slot may be annulled if the branch is false.  If annulling is not
7238supported for that delay slot, @code{(nil)} should be coded.
7239
7240For example, in the common case where branch and call insns require
7241a single delay slot, which may contain any insn other than a branch or
7242call, the following would be placed in the @file{md} file:
7243
7244@smallexample
7245(define_delay (eq_attr "type" "branch,call")
7246              [(eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") (nil) (nil)])
7247@end smallexample
7248
7249Multiple @code{define_delay} expressions may be specified.  In this
7250case, each such expression specifies different delay slot requirements
7251and there must be no insn for which tests in two @code{define_delay}
7252expressions are both true.
7253
7254For example, if we have a machine that requires one delay slot for branches
7255but two for calls,  no delay slot can contain a branch or call insn,
7256and any valid insn in the delay slot for the branch can be annulled if the
7257branch is true, we might represent this as follows:
7258
7259@smallexample
7260(define_delay (eq_attr "type" "branch")
7261   [(eq_attr "type" "!branch,call")
7262    (eq_attr "type" "!branch,call")
7263    (nil)])
7264
7265(define_delay (eq_attr "type" "call")
7266              [(eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") (nil) (nil)
7267               (eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") (nil) (nil)])
7268@end smallexample
7269@c the above is *still* too long.  --mew 4feb93
7270
7271@end ifset
7272@ifset INTERNALS
7273@node Processor pipeline description
7274@subsection Specifying processor pipeline description
7275@cindex processor pipeline description
7276@cindex processor functional units
7277@cindex instruction latency time
7278@cindex interlock delays
7279@cindex data dependence delays
7280@cindex reservation delays
7281@cindex pipeline hazard recognizer
7282@cindex automaton based pipeline description
7283@cindex regular expressions
7284@cindex deterministic finite state automaton
7285@cindex automaton based scheduler
7286@cindex RISC
7287@cindex VLIW
7288
7289To achieve better performance, most modern processors
7290(super-pipelined, superscalar @acronym{RISC}, and @acronym{VLIW}
7291processors) have many @dfn{functional units} on which several
7292instructions can be executed simultaneously.  An instruction starts
7293execution if its issue conditions are satisfied.  If not, the
7294instruction is stalled until its conditions are satisfied.  Such
7295@dfn{interlock (pipeline) delay} causes interruption of the fetching
7296of successor instructions (or demands nop instructions, e.g.@: for some
7297MIPS processors).
7298
7299There are two major kinds of interlock delays in modern processors.
7300The first one is a data dependence delay determining @dfn{instruction
7301latency time}.  The instruction execution is not started until all
7302source data have been evaluated by prior instructions (there are more
7303complex cases when the instruction execution starts even when the data
7304are not available but will be ready in given time after the
7305instruction execution start).  Taking the data dependence delays into
7306account is simple.  The data dependence (true, output, and
7307anti-dependence) delay between two instructions is given by a
7308constant.  In most cases this approach is adequate.  The second kind
7309of interlock delays is a reservation delay.  The reservation delay
7310means that two instructions under execution will be in need of shared
7311processors resources, i.e.@: buses, internal registers, and/or
7312functional units, which are reserved for some time.  Taking this kind
7313of delay into account is complex especially for modern @acronym{RISC}
7314processors.
7315
7316The task of exploiting more processor parallelism is solved by an
7317instruction scheduler.  For a better solution to this problem, the
7318instruction scheduler has to have an adequate description of the
7319processor parallelism (or @dfn{pipeline description}).  GCC
7320machine descriptions describe processor parallelism and functional
7321unit reservations for groups of instructions with the aid of
7322@dfn{regular expressions}.
7323
7324The GCC instruction scheduler uses a @dfn{pipeline hazard recognizer} to
7325figure out the possibility of the instruction issue by the processor
7326on a given simulated processor cycle.  The pipeline hazard recognizer is
7327automatically generated from the processor pipeline description.  The
7328pipeline hazard recognizer generated from the machine description
7329is based on a deterministic finite state automaton (@acronym{DFA}):
7330the instruction issue is possible if there is a transition from one
7331automaton state to another one.  This algorithm is very fast, and
7332furthermore, its speed is not dependent on processor
7333complexity@footnote{However, the size of the automaton depends on
7334processor complexity.  To limit this effect, machine descriptions
7335can split orthogonal parts of the machine description among several
7336automata: but then, since each of these must be stepped independently,
7337this does cause a small decrease in the algorithm's performance.}.
7338
7339@cindex automaton based pipeline description
7340The rest of this section describes the directives that constitute
7341an automaton-based processor pipeline description.  The order of
7342these constructions within the machine description file is not
7343important.
7344
7345@findex define_automaton
7346@cindex pipeline hazard recognizer
7347The following optional construction describes names of automata
7348generated and used for the pipeline hazards recognition.  Sometimes
7349the generated finite state automaton used by the pipeline hazard
7350recognizer is large.  If we use more than one automaton and bind functional
7351units to the automata, the total size of the automata is usually
7352less than the size of the single automaton.  If there is no one such
7353construction, only one finite state automaton is generated.
7354
7355@smallexample
7356(define_automaton @var{automata-names})
7357@end smallexample
7358
7359@var{automata-names} is a string giving names of the automata.  The
7360names are separated by commas.  All the automata should have unique names.
7361The automaton name is used in the constructions @code{define_cpu_unit} and
7362@code{define_query_cpu_unit}.
7363
7364@findex define_cpu_unit
7365@cindex processor functional units
7366Each processor functional unit used in the description of instruction
7367reservations should be described by the following construction.
7368
7369@smallexample
7370(define_cpu_unit @var{unit-names} [@var{automaton-name}])
7371@end smallexample
7372
7373@var{unit-names} is a string giving the names of the functional units
7374separated by commas.  Don't use name @samp{nothing}, it is reserved
7375for other goals.
7376
7377@var{automaton-name} is a string giving the name of the automaton with
7378which the unit is bound.  The automaton should be described in
7379construction @code{define_automaton}.  You should give
7380@dfn{automaton-name}, if there is a defined automaton.
7381
7382The assignment of units to automata are constrained by the uses of the
7383units in insn reservations.  The most important constraint is: if a
7384unit reservation is present on a particular cycle of an alternative
7385for an insn reservation, then some unit from the same automaton must
7386be present on the same cycle for the other alternatives of the insn
7387reservation.  The rest of the constraints are mentioned in the
7388description of the subsequent constructions.
7389
7390@findex define_query_cpu_unit
7391@cindex querying function unit reservations
7392The following construction describes CPU functional units analogously
7393to @code{define_cpu_unit}.  The reservation of such units can be
7394queried for an automaton state.  The instruction scheduler never
7395queries reservation of functional units for given automaton state.  So
7396as a rule, you don't need this construction.  This construction could
7397be used for future code generation goals (e.g.@: to generate
7398@acronym{VLIW} insn templates).
7399
7400@smallexample
7401(define_query_cpu_unit @var{unit-names} [@var{automaton-name}])
7402@end smallexample
7403
7404@var{unit-names} is a string giving names of the functional units
7405separated by commas.
7406
7407@var{automaton-name} is a string giving the name of the automaton with
7408which the unit is bound.
7409
7410@findex define_insn_reservation
7411@cindex instruction latency time
7412@cindex regular expressions
7413@cindex data bypass
7414The following construction is the major one to describe pipeline
7415characteristics of an instruction.
7416
7417@smallexample
7418(define_insn_reservation @var{insn-name} @var{default_latency}
7419                         @var{condition} @var{regexp})
7420@end smallexample
7421
7422@var{default_latency} is a number giving latency time of the
7423instruction.  There is an important difference between the old
7424description and the automaton based pipeline description.  The latency
7425time is used for all dependencies when we use the old description.  In
7426the automaton based pipeline description, the given latency time is only
7427used for true dependencies.  The cost of anti-dependencies is always
7428zero and the cost of output dependencies is the difference between
7429latency times of the producing and consuming insns (if the difference
7430is negative, the cost is considered to be zero).  You can always
7431change the default costs for any description by using the target hook
7432@code{TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST} (@pxref{Scheduling}).
7433
7434@var{insn-name} is a string giving the internal name of the insn.  The
7435internal names are used in constructions @code{define_bypass} and in
7436the automaton description file generated for debugging.  The internal
7437name has nothing in common with the names in @code{define_insn}.  It is a
7438good practice to use insn classes described in the processor manual.
7439
7440@var{condition} defines what RTL insns are described by this
7441construction.  You should remember that you will be in trouble if
7442@var{condition} for two or more different
7443@code{define_insn_reservation} constructions is TRUE for an insn.  In
7444this case what reservation will be used for the insn is not defined.
7445Such cases are not checked during generation of the pipeline hazards
7446recognizer because in general recognizing that two conditions may have
7447the same value is quite difficult (especially if the conditions
7448contain @code{symbol_ref}).  It is also not checked during the
7449pipeline hazard recognizer work because it would slow down the
7450recognizer considerably.
7451
7452@var{regexp} is a string describing the reservation of the cpu's functional
7453units by the instruction.  The reservations are described by a regular
7454expression according to the following syntax:
7455
7456@smallexample
7457       regexp = regexp "," oneof
7458              | oneof
7459
7460       oneof = oneof "|" allof
7461             | allof
7462
7463       allof = allof "+" repeat
7464             | repeat
7465
7466       repeat = element "*" number
7467              | element
7468
7469       element = cpu_function_unit_name
7470               | reservation_name
7471               | result_name
7472               | "nothing"
7473               | "(" regexp ")"
7474@end smallexample
7475
7476@itemize @bullet
7477@item
7478@samp{,} is used for describing the start of the next cycle in
7479the reservation.
7480
7481@item
7482@samp{|} is used for describing a reservation described by the first
7483regular expression @strong{or} a reservation described by the second
7484regular expression @strong{or} etc.
7485
7486@item
7487@samp{+} is used for describing a reservation described by the first
7488regular expression @strong{and} a reservation described by the
7489second regular expression @strong{and} etc.
7490
7491@item
7492@samp{*} is used for convenience and simply means a sequence in which
7493the regular expression are repeated @var{number} times with cycle
7494advancing (see @samp{,}).
7495
7496@item
7497@samp{cpu_function_unit_name} denotes reservation of the named
7498functional unit.
7499
7500@item
7501@samp{reservation_name} --- see description of construction
7502@samp{define_reservation}.
7503
7504@item
7505@samp{nothing} denotes no unit reservations.
7506@end itemize
7507
7508@findex define_reservation
7509Sometimes unit reservations for different insns contain common parts.
7510In such case, you can simplify the pipeline description by describing
7511the common part by the following construction
7512
7513@smallexample
7514(define_reservation @var{reservation-name} @var{regexp})
7515@end smallexample
7516
7517@var{reservation-name} is a string giving name of @var{regexp}.
7518Functional unit names and reservation names are in the same name
7519space.  So the reservation names should be different from the
7520functional unit names and can not be the reserved name @samp{nothing}.
7521
7522@findex define_bypass
7523@cindex instruction latency time
7524@cindex data bypass
7525The following construction is used to describe exceptions in the
7526latency time for given instruction pair.  This is so called bypasses.
7527
7528@smallexample
7529(define_bypass @var{number} @var{out_insn_names} @var{in_insn_names}
7530               [@var{guard}])
7531@end smallexample
7532
7533@var{number} defines when the result generated by the instructions
7534given in string @var{out_insn_names} will be ready for the
7535instructions given in string @var{in_insn_names}.  The instructions in
7536the string are separated by commas.
7537
7538@var{guard} is an optional string giving the name of a C function which
7539defines an additional guard for the bypass.  The function will get the
7540two insns as parameters.  If the function returns zero the bypass will
7541be ignored for this case.  The additional guard is necessary to
7542recognize complicated bypasses, e.g.@: when the consumer is only an address
7543of insn @samp{store} (not a stored value).
7544
7545If there are more one bypass with the same output and input insns, the
7546chosen bypass is the first bypass with a guard in description whose
7547guard function returns nonzero.  If there is no such bypass, then
7548bypass without the guard function is chosen.
7549
7550@findex exclusion_set
7551@findex presence_set
7552@findex final_presence_set
7553@findex absence_set
7554@findex final_absence_set
7555@cindex VLIW
7556@cindex RISC
7557The following five constructions are usually used to describe
7558@acronym{VLIW} processors, or more precisely, to describe a placement
7559of small instructions into @acronym{VLIW} instruction slots.  They
7560can be used for @acronym{RISC} processors, too.
7561
7562@smallexample
7563(exclusion_set @var{unit-names} @var{unit-names})
7564(presence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns})
7565(final_presence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns})
7566(absence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns})
7567(final_absence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns})
7568@end smallexample
7569
7570@var{unit-names} is a string giving names of functional units
7571separated by commas.
7572
7573@var{patterns} is a string giving patterns of functional units
7574separated by comma.  Currently pattern is one unit or units
7575separated by white-spaces.
7576
7577The first construction (@samp{exclusion_set}) means that each
7578functional unit in the first string can not be reserved simultaneously
7579with a unit whose name is in the second string and vice versa.  For
7580example, the construction is useful for describing processors
7581(e.g.@: some SPARC processors) with a fully pipelined floating point
7582functional unit which can execute simultaneously only single floating
7583point insns or only double floating point insns.
7584
7585The second construction (@samp{presence_set}) means that each
7586functional unit in the first string can not be reserved unless at
7587least one of pattern of units whose names are in the second string is
7588reserved.  This is an asymmetric relation.  For example, it is useful
7589for description that @acronym{VLIW} @samp{slot1} is reserved after
7590@samp{slot0} reservation.  We could describe it by the following
7591construction
7592
7593@smallexample
7594(presence_set "slot1" "slot0")
7595@end smallexample
7596
7597Or @samp{slot1} is reserved only after @samp{slot0} and unit @samp{b0}
7598reservation.  In this case we could write
7599
7600@smallexample
7601(presence_set "slot1" "slot0 b0")
7602@end smallexample
7603
7604The third construction (@samp{final_presence_set}) is analogous to
7605@samp{presence_set}.  The difference between them is when checking is
7606done.  When an instruction is issued in given automaton state
7607reflecting all current and planned unit reservations, the automaton
7608state is changed.  The first state is a source state, the second one
7609is a result state.  Checking for @samp{presence_set} is done on the
7610source state reservation, checking for @samp{final_presence_set} is
7611done on the result reservation.  This construction is useful to
7612describe a reservation which is actually two subsequent reservations.
7613For example, if we use
7614
7615@smallexample
7616(presence_set "slot1" "slot0")
7617@end smallexample
7618
7619the following insn will be never issued (because @samp{slot1} requires
7620@samp{slot0} which is absent in the source state).
7621
7622@smallexample
7623(define_reservation "insn_and_nop" "slot0 + slot1")
7624@end smallexample
7625
7626but it can be issued if we use analogous @samp{final_presence_set}.
7627
7628The forth construction (@samp{absence_set}) means that each functional
7629unit in the first string can be reserved only if each pattern of units
7630whose names are in the second string is not reserved.  This is an
7631asymmetric relation (actually @samp{exclusion_set} is analogous to
7632this one but it is symmetric).  For example it might be useful in a
7633@acronym{VLIW} description to say that @samp{slot0} cannot be reserved
7634after either @samp{slot1} or @samp{slot2} have been reserved.  This
7635can be described as:
7636
7637@smallexample
7638(absence_set "slot0" "slot1, slot2")
7639@end smallexample
7640
7641Or @samp{slot2} can not be reserved if @samp{slot0} and unit @samp{b0}
7642are reserved or @samp{slot1} and unit @samp{b1} are reserved.  In
7643this case we could write
7644
7645@smallexample
7646(absence_set "slot2" "slot0 b0, slot1 b1")
7647@end smallexample
7648
7649All functional units mentioned in a set should belong to the same
7650automaton.
7651
7652The last construction (@samp{final_absence_set}) is analogous to
7653@samp{absence_set} but checking is done on the result (state)
7654reservation.  See comments for @samp{final_presence_set}.
7655
7656@findex automata_option
7657@cindex deterministic finite state automaton
7658@cindex nondeterministic finite state automaton
7659@cindex finite state automaton minimization
7660You can control the generator of the pipeline hazard recognizer with
7661the following construction.
7662
7663@smallexample
7664(automata_option @var{options})
7665@end smallexample
7666
7667@var{options} is a string giving options which affect the generated
7668code.  Currently there are the following options:
7669
7670@itemize @bullet
7671@item
7672@dfn{no-minimization} makes no minimization of the automaton.  This is
7673only worth to do when we are debugging the description and need to
7674look more accurately at reservations of states.
7675
7676@item
7677@dfn{time} means printing time statistics about the generation of
7678automata.
7679
7680@item
7681@dfn{stats} means printing statistics about the generated automata
7682such as the number of DFA states, NDFA states and arcs.
7683
7684@item
7685@dfn{v} means a generation of the file describing the result automata.
7686The file has suffix @samp{.dfa} and can be used for the description
7687verification and debugging.
7688
7689@item
7690@dfn{w} means a generation of warning instead of error for
7691non-critical errors.
7692
7693@item
7694@dfn{ndfa} makes nondeterministic finite state automata.  This affects
7695the treatment of operator @samp{|} in the regular expressions.  The
7696usual treatment of the operator is to try the first alternative and,
7697if the reservation is not possible, the second alternative.  The
7698nondeterministic treatment means trying all alternatives, some of them
7699may be rejected by reservations in the subsequent insns.
7700
7701@item
7702@dfn{progress} means output of a progress bar showing how many states
7703were generated so far for automaton being processed.  This is useful
7704during debugging a @acronym{DFA} description.  If you see too many
7705generated states, you could interrupt the generator of the pipeline
7706hazard recognizer and try to figure out a reason for generation of the
7707huge automaton.
7708@end itemize
7709
7710As an example, consider a superscalar @acronym{RISC} machine which can
7711issue three insns (two integer insns and one floating point insn) on
7712the cycle but can finish only two insns.  To describe this, we define
7713the following functional units.
7714
7715@smallexample
7716(define_cpu_unit "i0_pipeline, i1_pipeline, f_pipeline")
7717(define_cpu_unit "port0, port1")
7718@end smallexample
7719
7720All simple integer insns can be executed in any integer pipeline and
7721their result is ready in two cycles.  The simple integer insns are
7722issued into the first pipeline unless it is reserved, otherwise they
7723are issued into the second pipeline.  Integer division and
7724multiplication insns can be executed only in the second integer
7725pipeline and their results are ready correspondingly in 8 and 4
7726cycles.  The integer division is not pipelined, i.e.@: the subsequent
7727integer division insn can not be issued until the current division
7728insn finished.  Floating point insns are fully pipelined and their
7729results are ready in 3 cycles.  Where the result of a floating point
7730insn is used by an integer insn, an additional delay of one cycle is
7731incurred.  To describe all of this we could specify
7732
7733@smallexample
7734(define_cpu_unit "div")
7735
7736(define_insn_reservation "simple" 2 (eq_attr "type" "int")
7737                         "(i0_pipeline | i1_pipeline), (port0 | port1)")
7738
7739(define_insn_reservation "mult" 4 (eq_attr "type" "mult")
7740                         "i1_pipeline, nothing*2, (port0 | port1)")
7741
7742(define_insn_reservation "div" 8 (eq_attr "type" "div")
7743                         "i1_pipeline, div*7, div + (port0 | port1)")
7744
7745(define_insn_reservation "float" 3 (eq_attr "type" "float")
7746                         "f_pipeline, nothing, (port0 | port1))
7747
7748(define_bypass 4 "float" "simple,mult,div")
7749@end smallexample
7750
7751To simplify the description we could describe the following reservation
7752
7753@smallexample
7754(define_reservation "finish" "port0|port1")
7755@end smallexample
7756
7757and use it in all @code{define_insn_reservation} as in the following
7758construction
7759
7760@smallexample
7761(define_insn_reservation "simple" 2 (eq_attr "type" "int")
7762                         "(i0_pipeline | i1_pipeline), finish")
7763@end smallexample
7764
7765
7766@end ifset
7767@ifset INTERNALS
7768@node Conditional Execution
7769@section Conditional Execution
7770@cindex conditional execution
7771@cindex predication
7772
7773A number of architectures provide for some form of conditional
7774execution, or predication.  The hallmark of this feature is the
7775ability to nullify most of the instructions in the instruction set.
7776When the instruction set is large and not entirely symmetric, it
7777can be quite tedious to describe these forms directly in the
7778@file{.md} file.  An alternative is the @code{define_cond_exec} template.
7779
7780@findex define_cond_exec
7781@smallexample
7782(define_cond_exec
7783  [@var{predicate-pattern}]
7784  "@var{condition}"
7785  "@var{output-template}")
7786@end smallexample
7787
7788@var{predicate-pattern} is the condition that must be true for the
7789insn to be executed at runtime and should match a relational operator.
7790One can use @code{match_operator} to match several relational operators
7791at once.  Any @code{match_operand} operands must have no more than one
7792alternative.
7793
7794@var{condition} is a C expression that must be true for the generated
7795pattern to match.
7796
7797@findex current_insn_predicate
7798@var{output-template} is a string similar to the @code{define_insn}
7799output template (@pxref{Output Template}), except that the @samp{*}
7800and @samp{@@} special cases do not apply.  This is only useful if the
7801assembly text for the predicate is a simple prefix to the main insn.
7802In order to handle the general case, there is a global variable
7803@code{current_insn_predicate} that will contain the entire predicate
7804if the current insn is predicated, and will otherwise be @code{NULL}.
7805
7806When @code{define_cond_exec} is used, an implicit reference to
7807the @code{predicable} instruction attribute is made.
7808@xref{Insn Attributes}.  This attribute must be boolean (i.e.@: have
7809exactly two elements in its @var{list-of-values}).  Further, it must
7810not be used with complex expressions.  That is, the default and all
7811uses in the insns must be a simple constant, not dependent on the
7812alternative or anything else.
7813
7814For each @code{define_insn} for which the @code{predicable}
7815attribute is true, a new @code{define_insn} pattern will be
7816generated that matches a predicated version of the instruction.
7817For example,
7818
7819@smallexample
7820(define_insn "addsi"
7821  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "r")
7822        (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "r")
7823                 (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "r")))]
7824  "@var{test1}"
7825  "add %2,%1,%0")
7826
7827(define_cond_exec
7828  [(ne (match_operand:CC 0 "register_operand" "c")
7829       (const_int 0))]
7830  "@var{test2}"
7831  "(%0)")
7832@end smallexample
7833
7834@noindent
7835generates a new pattern
7836
7837@smallexample
7838(define_insn ""
7839  [(cond_exec
7840     (ne (match_operand:CC 3 "register_operand" "c") (const_int 0))
7841     (set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "r")
7842          (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "r")
7843                   (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "r"))))]
7844  "(@var{test2}) && (@var{test1})"
7845  "(%3) add %2,%1,%0")
7846@end smallexample
7847
7848@end ifset
7849@ifset INTERNALS
7850@node Constant Definitions
7851@section Constant Definitions
7852@cindex constant definitions
7853@findex define_constants
7854
7855Using literal constants inside instruction patterns reduces legibility and
7856can be a maintenance problem.
7857
7858To overcome this problem, you may use the @code{define_constants}
7859expression.  It contains a vector of name-value pairs.  From that
7860point on, wherever any of the names appears in the MD file, it is as
7861if the corresponding value had been written instead.  You may use
7862@code{define_constants} multiple times; each appearance adds more
7863constants to the table.  It is an error to redefine a constant with
7864a different value.
7865
7866To come back to the a29k load multiple example, instead of
7867
7868@smallexample
7869(define_insn ""
7870  [(match_parallel 0 "load_multiple_operation"
7871     [(set (match_operand:SI 1 "gpc_reg_operand" "=r")
7872           (match_operand:SI 2 "memory_operand" "m"))
7873      (use (reg:SI 179))
7874      (clobber (reg:SI 179))])]
7875  ""
7876  "loadm 0,0,%1,%2")
7877@end smallexample
7878
7879You could write:
7880
7881@smallexample
7882(define_constants [
7883    (R_BP 177)
7884    (R_FC 178)
7885    (R_CR 179)
7886    (R_Q  180)
7887])
7888
7889(define_insn ""
7890  [(match_parallel 0 "load_multiple_operation"
7891     [(set (match_operand:SI 1 "gpc_reg_operand" "=r")
7892           (match_operand:SI 2 "memory_operand" "m"))
7893      (use (reg:SI R_CR))
7894      (clobber (reg:SI R_CR))])]
7895  ""
7896  "loadm 0,0,%1,%2")
7897@end smallexample
7898
7899The constants that are defined with a define_constant are also output
7900in the insn-codes.h header file as #defines.
7901@end ifset
7902@ifset INTERNALS
7903@node Iterators
7904@section Iterators
7905@cindex iterators in @file{.md} files
7906
7907Ports often need to define similar patterns for more than one machine
7908mode or for more than one rtx code.  GCC provides some simple iterator
7909facilities to make this process easier.
7910
7911@menu
7912* Mode Iterators::         Generating variations of patterns for different modes.
7913* Code Iterators::         Doing the same for codes.
7914@end menu
7915
7916@node Mode Iterators
7917@subsection Mode Iterators
7918@cindex mode iterators in @file{.md} files
7919
7920Ports often need to define similar patterns for two or more different modes.
7921For example:
7922
7923@itemize @bullet
7924@item
7925If a processor has hardware support for both single and double
7926floating-point arithmetic, the @code{SFmode} patterns tend to be
7927very similar to the @code{DFmode} ones.
7928
7929@item
7930If a port uses @code{SImode} pointers in one configuration and
7931@code{DImode} pointers in another, it will usually have very similar
7932@code{SImode} and @code{DImode} patterns for manipulating pointers.
7933@end itemize
7934
7935Mode iterators allow several patterns to be instantiated from one
7936@file{.md} file template.  They can be used with any type of
7937rtx-based construct, such as a @code{define_insn},
7938@code{define_split}, or @code{define_peephole2}.
7939
7940@menu
7941* Defining Mode Iterators:: Defining a new mode iterator.
7942* Substitutions::           Combining mode iterators with substitutions
7943* Examples::                Examples
7944@end menu
7945
7946@node Defining Mode Iterators
7947@subsubsection Defining Mode Iterators
7948@findex define_mode_iterator
7949
7950The syntax for defining a mode iterator is:
7951
7952@smallexample
7953(define_mode_iterator @var{name} [(@var{mode1} "@var{cond1}") @dots{} (@var{moden} "@var{condn}")])
7954@end smallexample
7955
7956This allows subsequent @file{.md} file constructs to use the mode suffix
7957@code{:@var{name}}.  Every construct that does so will be expanded
7958@var{n} times, once with every use of @code{:@var{name}} replaced by
7959@code{:@var{mode1}}, once with every use replaced by @code{:@var{mode2}},
7960and so on.  In the expansion for a particular @var{modei}, every
7961C condition will also require that @var{condi} be true.
7962
7963For example:
7964
7965@smallexample
7966(define_mode_iterator P [(SI "Pmode == SImode") (DI "Pmode == DImode")])
7967@end smallexample
7968
7969defines a new mode suffix @code{:P}.  Every construct that uses
7970@code{:P} will be expanded twice, once with every @code{:P} replaced
7971by @code{:SI} and once with every @code{:P} replaced by @code{:DI}.
7972The @code{:SI} version will only apply if @code{Pmode == SImode} and
7973the @code{:DI} version will only apply if @code{Pmode == DImode}.
7974
7975As with other @file{.md} conditions, an empty string is treated
7976as ``always true''.  @code{(@var{mode} "")} can also be abbreviated
7977to @code{@var{mode}}.  For example:
7978
7979@smallexample
7980(define_mode_iterator GPR [SI (DI "TARGET_64BIT")])
7981@end smallexample
7982
7983means that the @code{:DI} expansion only applies if @code{TARGET_64BIT}
7984but that the @code{:SI} expansion has no such constraint.
7985
7986Iterators are applied in the order they are defined.  This can be
7987significant if two iterators are used in a construct that requires
7988substitutions.  @xref{Substitutions}.
7989
7990@node Substitutions
7991@subsubsection Substitution in Mode Iterators
7992@findex define_mode_attr
7993
7994If an @file{.md} file construct uses mode iterators, each version of the
7995construct will often need slightly different strings or modes.  For
7996example:
7997
7998@itemize @bullet
7999@item
8000When a @code{define_expand} defines several @code{add@var{m}3} patterns
8001(@pxref{Standard Names}), each expander will need to use the
8002appropriate mode name for @var{m}.
8003
8004@item
8005When a @code{define_insn} defines several instruction patterns,
8006each instruction will often use a different assembler mnemonic.
8007
8008@item
8009When a @code{define_insn} requires operands with different modes,
8010using an iterator for one of the operand modes usually requires a specific
8011mode for the other operand(s).
8012@end itemize
8013
8014GCC supports such variations through a system of ``mode attributes''.
8015There are two standard attributes: @code{mode}, which is the name of
8016the mode in lower case, and @code{MODE}, which is the same thing in
8017upper case.  You can define other attributes using:
8018
8019@smallexample
8020(define_mode_attr @var{name} [(@var{mode1} "@var{value1}") @dots{} (@var{moden} "@var{valuen}")])
8021@end smallexample
8022
8023where @var{name} is the name of the attribute and @var{valuei}
8024is the value associated with @var{modei}.
8025
8026When GCC replaces some @var{:iterator} with @var{:mode}, it will scan
8027each string and mode in the pattern for sequences of the form
8028@code{<@var{iterator}:@var{attr}>}, where @var{attr} is the name of a
8029mode attribute.  If the attribute is defined for @var{mode}, the whole
8030@code{<@dots{}>} sequence will be replaced by the appropriate attribute
8031value.
8032
8033For example, suppose an @file{.md} file has:
8034
8035@smallexample
8036(define_mode_iterator P [(SI "Pmode == SImode") (DI "Pmode == DImode")])
8037(define_mode_attr load [(SI "lw") (DI "ld")])
8038@end smallexample
8039
8040If one of the patterns that uses @code{:P} contains the string
8041@code{"<P:load>\t%0,%1"}, the @code{SI} version of that pattern
8042will use @code{"lw\t%0,%1"} and the @code{DI} version will use
8043@code{"ld\t%0,%1"}.
8044
8045Here is an example of using an attribute for a mode:
8046
8047@smallexample
8048(define_mode_iterator LONG [SI DI])
8049(define_mode_attr SHORT [(SI "HI") (DI "SI")])
8050(define_insn @dots{}
8051  (sign_extend:LONG (match_operand:<LONG:SHORT> @dots{})) @dots{})
8052@end smallexample
8053
8054The @code{@var{iterator}:} prefix may be omitted, in which case the
8055substitution will be attempted for every iterator expansion.
8056
8057@node Examples
8058@subsubsection Mode Iterator Examples
8059
8060Here is an example from the MIPS port.  It defines the following
8061modes and attributes (among others):
8062
8063@smallexample
8064(define_mode_iterator GPR [SI (DI "TARGET_64BIT")])
8065(define_mode_attr d [(SI "") (DI "d")])
8066@end smallexample
8067
8068and uses the following template to define both @code{subsi3}
8069and @code{subdi3}:
8070
8071@smallexample
8072(define_insn "sub<mode>3"
8073  [(set (match_operand:GPR 0 "register_operand" "=d")
8074        (minus:GPR (match_operand:GPR 1 "register_operand" "d")
8075                   (match_operand:GPR 2 "register_operand" "d")))]
8076  ""
8077  "<d>subu\t%0,%1,%2"
8078  [(set_attr "type" "arith")
8079   (set_attr "mode" "<MODE>")])
8080@end smallexample
8081
8082This is exactly equivalent to:
8083
8084@smallexample
8085(define_insn "subsi3"
8086  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "=d")
8087        (minus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "d")
8088                  (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "d")))]
8089  ""
8090  "subu\t%0,%1,%2"
8091  [(set_attr "type" "arith")
8092   (set_attr "mode" "SI")])
8093
8094(define_insn "subdi3"
8095  [(set (match_operand:DI 0 "register_operand" "=d")
8096        (minus:DI (match_operand:DI 1 "register_operand" "d")
8097                  (match_operand:DI 2 "register_operand" "d")))]
8098  ""
8099  "dsubu\t%0,%1,%2"
8100  [(set_attr "type" "arith")
8101   (set_attr "mode" "DI")])
8102@end smallexample
8103
8104@node Code Iterators
8105@subsection Code Iterators
8106@cindex code iterators in @file{.md} files
8107@findex define_code_iterator
8108@findex define_code_attr
8109
8110Code iterators operate in a similar way to mode iterators.  @xref{Mode Iterators}.
8111
8112The construct:
8113
8114@smallexample
8115(define_code_iterator @var{name} [(@var{code1} "@var{cond1}") @dots{} (@var{coden} "@var{condn}")])
8116@end smallexample
8117
8118defines a pseudo rtx code @var{name} that can be instantiated as
8119@var{codei} if condition @var{condi} is true.  Each @var{codei}
8120must have the same rtx format.  @xref{RTL Classes}.
8121
8122As with mode iterators, each pattern that uses @var{name} will be
8123expanded @var{n} times, once with all uses of @var{name} replaced by
8124@var{code1}, once with all uses replaced by @var{code2}, and so on.
8125@xref{Defining Mode Iterators}.
8126
8127It is possible to define attributes for codes as well as for modes.
8128There are two standard code attributes: @code{code}, the name of the
8129code in lower case, and @code{CODE}, the name of the code in upper case.
8130Other attributes are defined using:
8131
8132@smallexample
8133(define_code_attr @var{name} [(@var{code1} "@var{value1}") @dots{} (@var{coden} "@var{valuen}")])
8134@end smallexample
8135
8136Here's an example of code iterators in action, taken from the MIPS port:
8137
8138@smallexample
8139(define_code_iterator any_cond [unordered ordered unlt unge uneq ltgt unle ungt
8140                                eq ne gt ge lt le gtu geu ltu leu])
8141
8142(define_expand "b<code>"
8143  [(set (pc)
8144        (if_then_else (any_cond:CC (cc0)
8145                                   (const_int 0))
8146                      (label_ref (match_operand 0 ""))
8147                      (pc)))]
8148  ""
8149@{
8150  gen_conditional_branch (operands, <CODE>);
8151  DONE;
8152@})
8153@end smallexample
8154
8155This is equivalent to:
8156
8157@smallexample
8158(define_expand "bunordered"
8159  [(set (pc)
8160        (if_then_else (unordered:CC (cc0)
8161                                    (const_int 0))
8162                      (label_ref (match_operand 0 ""))
8163                      (pc)))]
8164  ""
8165@{
8166  gen_conditional_branch (operands, UNORDERED);
8167  DONE;
8168@})
8169
8170(define_expand "bordered"
8171  [(set (pc)
8172        (if_then_else (ordered:CC (cc0)
8173                                  (const_int 0))
8174                      (label_ref (match_operand 0 ""))
8175                      (pc)))]
8176  ""
8177@{
8178  gen_conditional_branch (operands, ORDERED);
8179  DONE;
8180@})
8181
8182@dots{}
8183@end smallexample
8184
8185@end ifset
8186